Home

2009 Jeep Commander

1. 17 keerd a ER EE EET ER NG 17 Replacement Keys caue sek cas E Euer 18 O Customer Key Programming 19 E ener Vida egudsayxde tera ds 20 W Vehicle Security Alarm 20 HiRestming Le System ugue cipes up eg ea 20 Ee ig el Ihe lam os AE ee EER ES S PS 20 To Disarm The System si ee es 21 N llluminated Entry 21 Bl Remote Keyless Entry 4 22 o To Unlock The Doors steeds Gane HA 22 H l Lock Ihe DOOS 3s 9 hp E 24 o To Release The Liftgate Flipper Glass 24 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee O Express Down Window Feature li BQUIPPCC 23 52 2 59 28 4p So x9 GE d EUR nce 24 HUsme Ihe Danie Alarmi ze umewa oo 2 VERB eps 25 O Programming Additional Transmitters 20 H Transmitter Battery Service ae aee uns 25 General Information 33 ey wa 9 BED resi 26 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 27 Li How Jo Use Remote Statt aus sis ra ce ans Af NM Door Locks oa eU RES ER ES EE BOE DR RD 29 o Manual Door Locks 3 uuu ud dre RED Ese 2 O Power Door Locks mis SEE HERE RR 29 O Child Protection Door Lock 30 B Windows O Power Windows End BUffellg sa uniuerso seen ge ud N Liftgate O Liftgate Flipper Glass O Power Liftgate If Equipped lll Occupant Restraints Hiap houldet Beus 2452 2 229 DoE HEERS ED O Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions D Adjustable Upper Shoulder
2. 294 415 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 294 415 Oil Change Indicator lille 199 N INDEX 477 Oil Change Indicator Reset ssa sesse ieee ceases 199 OLEND sipiris ite kr YER Ce E ed ki 394 GP APT 436 Chonso derd soos secar dE OE en eco ws 394 DIDSHER os Bee Ses 2 he eee RE Poe oes 394 Liposd 2239x449 rrido PORA EROR RAS 396 Iu eesin pera BREED AE oie PITT 396 Filter Disposal a5 cane te were q airs gero Par dd 396 Id ntification LOCO soorte Redon phos 9 RC n 395 Materials Added to ae she KM dr x eed 396 Recommendation 395 436 GIE ios ac pea soa We hae OOS PES 995 MISCOSUY 22646455855 eR AG EE ERE ES 395 436 Onboard Diagnostic System 390 391 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 157 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0 4 81 OV MAUS MTM 289 Overdrive OFF Switch Overhead Console siras AT REELE HORE ROS d 157 Overheating Engine sig eds RE Lx geed 190 972 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 461 Pai Come rrr 415 Paint Damage vest dou ku due Fes Y RAS PR 415 Panel ss EE erias Be eek ERA DEE 25 Park Sense System Rest s xus soo rar DEd SE 151 Parke Drake ssi soe sm Seu sa Edo n rbd DR i 300 Passive DIE esse vd Padua x edax oes s 141 Pedals Adj staDle usus a debo arb Ser dd x 147 Personal me HUiES us oie anced oa eae Te BR 203 ME N FEE ER EER EET ET EE EET 70 Pets Hans POEHRE oou qua sees d
3. 0 0 0 Se ee 261 O Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System f Beui DEd ssis csi AE PER 261 D Automatic Temperature Control ATC BECUIDDOH 3 05 RS an ee EP REL PARERE RE 264 G Rear Climate Control If Equipped 24 HOperiiime Tips 2266544 obo he oo eS x 274 D Operating Tips Chart NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040105857 1 Air Outlet 5 Upper Switch Bank 9 Lower Switch Bank 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Power Outlet Cigar Lighter 10 Climate Controls 3 Radio 7 Storage Bin 11 Ignition Switch 4 Glove Compartment 8 Power Outlet 12 Storage Bin 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN 819e550f NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 1 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 2 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE OW If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster has been d
4. NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 331 NOTE e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire the tire fail dition ailure or condition Base System e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless while adjusting your tire pressure technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to es monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes dus i wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire readings to the Receiver Module 5 tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly stopping ability check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Light e Receiver Module e Ti
5. 305 O Tire Identification Number TIN 322 2 BAS Brake Assist System 305 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 323 W Tire Chains OR EE EO oe OR TE 927 O ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation 306 NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 279 W lire Rotation Recommendations 328 Hi Fuel System Cauhons cem x oe es 342 H Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 329 O Carbon Monoxide Warnings 343 Q Base ie x g4G4 e654 ou sare ose E 331 W Flexible Fuel 4 7L Engine Only RE NN 324 HEUP PE sis eis OR PEI b S RUE EE ERES 344 O General Information 339 eee e O weeks anes e in W Fuel Requirements 339 ee ee aa 537 And 4 7L Engine 0 eevee Bag Ue Regen J57L Enge eese ed o Reformulated Gasoline 340 TE N N 346 O Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 340 Cruising Range eee 346 eed ie on DEL EE ears an O Replacement Parts ee ee Res BERE SEE 347 ER OT aa 7 Adding Fuel oo 0 0 0 0 00 cee eevee 347 O Materials Added To Fuel 342 O Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap ee sed EE 347 280 STARTING AND OPERATING See W Vehicle Loading O Certification Label B Trailer Towing BG Common Towing Definitions O Trailer Hitch Classification H Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings O Trailer And Tongue Weight O Towing Requirements O Towing Tips N Snow Plow ll Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 0 Tow
6. Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal de pressed To operate the shift lock manual override per form the following steps 1 Turn the key to the ON position without starting the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel 4 Depress and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down Interlock Manual Override 286 STARTING AND OPERATING M 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used Five Speed Automatic Transmission The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to enga
7. EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing its L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 STARTING AND OPERATING 323 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Tire and Loading Information Placard Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed 9 the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you 5 adh
8. NOTE Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F OC Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 and Gasoline Vehicles Whether operating the vehicle on an E 85 ethanol fuel or unleaded gasoline the engine oil reguirements are the same Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for the proper guality and viscosity engine oil Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below OF 18 C In the range of 0 to 32 F 18 to 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in drivability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your MPG and your driv ing range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 347 Replacement Parts All components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com patible parts CAUTION e Replacing fuel system component
9. Insert a finger into each hole of the headlamp cover and 4 Turn the low or high beam bulb 1 4 turn counterclock pull upward to unsnap the rear edge of the cover from wise to unlock it from the housing the two upper lamp mounting brackets Slide the cover rearward to disengage the front edge from beneath the tab on the top near the front of the lamp housing 81bd52d0 1 Low Beam Bulb 2 High Beam Bulb 3 Front Park Turn Signal Bulb 3 Disconnect the electrical connector 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Pull the bulb and base straight out from the opening in the reflector CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol Front Turn Signal 1 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left or right 3 Reach through the access hole to access the park turn signal bulb socket on the bottom of the front lamp unit housing 2 Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel to unsnap and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield Access to the bulb can be gained through the wheel liner hole N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 4 Turn the socket on the bottom of the front lamp unit housing 1 4 turn counterclockwise to unlock it 5 Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the opening in the housing 6 Disconn
10. Kk RE Les S 18165f08f ERES ee es Cargo Load Floor 4 Pull up on loop s and twist 90 degrees so they are perpendicular straight up to the slotted hole in tray 5 Push loop s back down so they are parallel to the top of the tray REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer A switch on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the rear wiper washer function Rotating the center of the switch forward to the on position will activate the wiper The rear wiper operates in an inter mittent mode only Rotating the center of the switch all the way forward will turn on the wash function The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button is pressed Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position Windshield Wiper Washer Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if this happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to Park UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 If the liftgate flipper glass is open connection to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade When the liftgate flipper glass is closed the rear wiper switch or the ignition switch needs to be turned off and on
11. Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze is not recommended When adding engine coolant antifreeze 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precau tion Never add engine coolan
12. WARNING Continued NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard The ABS cannot prevent accidents including This is normal indicating that the ABS is functioning those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in can prevent accidents unpredictable braking action longer stopping dis The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must tances or brake damage never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous e When descending mountains or hills repeated brak manner which could jeopardize the user s safety ing can cause brake fade with loss of braking control or the safety of others Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission or locking out overdrive whenever pos CAUTION sible e Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm up which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control Be especially careful while driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuver ing parking or stopping The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly in stalled aftermarket radios or telephones 304 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE e Do not drive too fast for road conditions es
13. is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the scr
14. Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console and under the front seats to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to partially block airflow The center console outlets deliver condi tioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air Panel 7 Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Recirculation The recirculation feature can be selected with c the mode control knob You may choose be tween Bi Level Recirculation and Panel Recir culation air outlets while in this mode Nor mally air enters from outside the vehicle However when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is re used Use this mode to rapidly cool the inside of the vehicle The Recirculation mode can also be used to tempo rarily block out outside odors smoke and dust Air Conditioning To turn on the Air Conditioning set the fan control at any speed and press the snowflake button located on the control panel Conditioned air will be directed through the outlets selected by the mode control A light in the snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on Slight changes in engine speed or p
15. CONTENTS NOS ee ee ee EE RD SAGE ETInside Day Night Minor ge dee acc ppe oi D Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped D Outside Mirrors O Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature D Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped Ef ower MINOS usaron od n Geek Gee EDE o Heated Mirrors If Equipped O Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 80 80 81 82 82 82 83 83 O Sun Visor Extension If Equipped lBl uconnect phone If Equipped 84 APEGO 123 523 2 233 ke DE MEER EE oe 86 HPhone Call Fesittes 244444 129 peeve bes 94 D uconnect phone Features 96 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 101 D Things You Should Know About Your He oie PIONS a cu ciega Seen Oa VR 103 O General Information eae RR 112 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee ll Voice Recognition System VR Ir Eatipped 263352 ARE BERDE DERE RR Pia 112 O Voice Recognition System VR Operation 112 EC OUHTIABUS subse why So oe VIR E oe E 114 LE Voice Traut 23x Gt Ha OH ee aE Ro Ha 117 EE N ee ee ee 117 O Front Manual Seat Adjustment 117 O Front Seat Adjustment Recline 118 O Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment 119 O Eight Way Driver s Power Seat 119 O Four Way Passenger s Power Seat It BOUIDDed seperate dd et dst prr ya bee 120 A Head Restramis uo andes d Ba E CU RAS 120 O Front Heated Seats If Equipped 120 H Rear Heated
16. Engine Oil under Maintenance Proce dures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed NN THINGS TO KNOW B
17. IF EQUIPPED Once programmed the memory buttons 1 and 2 on the driver s door panel can be used to recall the driver s seat driver s outside mirror adjustable brake and accelerator pedals and radio station preset settings Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be pro grammed to recall the same positions when the UN ve LOCK button is pressed Pull Strap 3 Close the tailgate 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ae a EE EES Driver Memory Switches Your vehicle is eguipped with two RKE transmitters One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to four RKE transmitters each one linked to either of the two memory positions Setting Memory Positions and Linking Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the S SET button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store a new one 1 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Press the driver door memory button number 1 if you are setting the memory for driver 1 or button number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2 The system will recall any stored settings Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and driver s sideview mirror to the desired positions 4 Adjust the bra
18. Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names n nm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audi
19. The Rear Park Assist will remember the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON position The Rear Park Assist can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If the Rear Park Assist is enabled at this shift lever position the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi mately 10 mph 16 km h 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Park Assist Sensors The four Rear Park Assist Sensors located in the rear fascia monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 to 59 in 30 to 150 cm from the rear fascia in the horizontal direction depending on the location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of obstacle Rear Park Assist Warning Display The Rear Park Assist Warning Display located in the headliner near the flipper glass provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle erro When the ignition is turned to the ON position the warning display will turn ON all of its LEDs for about one second Each side of the warning display has six yellow and two red LEDs The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the red LED is ON
20. WARNING e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passen Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it ger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause se vere or fatal injury to the infant has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler LLC also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The front passenger seat belt is equipped with a cinching latch plate The second and third row seating positions have automatic locki
21. ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow LEDs when it is ON and detecting no obstacles The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM LED COLOR AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER 1st LED 59 in 150 cm Yes Half Second 2nd LED 51 in 130 cm 3rd LED 45 in 115 cm NOTE The Rear Park Assist system will MUTE the radio if on when the system is sounding an audio tone 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Enable Disable The Rear Park Assist The Rear Park Assist can be enabled and disabled with a switch located on the upper switch bank of the instru ment panel ed eee ee Rear Park Assist Switch When the switch is pressed to disable the system the instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST DIS ABLED message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual When the shift lever is changed to REVERSE and the system is disabled the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the message The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be ON when the Rear Park Assist is disabled or defective The Rear Park Assist Switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled Service The Rear Park Assist When the Rear Park Assist is defecti
22. nated area immediately with large quantities of 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive water terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away battery from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greater than 12 Volt system i e Do not use a 24 Volt power source WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 1 Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact 382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal WARNING Continued of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have e Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or a good contact on the engine of immobilized vehicle e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharge battery The resulting electrical spark 6 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 When removing the jumper cables reverse
23. 48 km h for distances of not more than 15 miles 24 km Towing at more than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 15 miles 24 km can cause severe transmission damage If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph 48 km h or farther than 15 miles 24 km remove the driveshaft or tow with all four wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the other end on a towing dolly 4 Wheel Drive Models Only The manufacturer recommends towing with all four wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the other end on a towing dolly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 3 7L 387 Bl Engine Compartment A7L 388 Bl Engine Compartment 57L 0 389 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 390 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 391 W Emissions Inspection And Maintenance LTOSTODUSS eo 4 gd RARR Fo ten UOS FOL oes 391 Mi Replacement Parts 393 W Dealer Service orkes Eie R Sono DERE 393 W Maintenance Procedures 394 DEM DEO ses 9d ee Soe OER Ge ED 394 H Engine Air Cleaner Filter 222i 396 O Maintenance Free Battery O Air Conditioner Maintenance D Body Lubrication o Windshield Wiper Blades 400 o Adding Washer Fluid 24
24. In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Set the Alarm The alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors and liftgate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light located in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming If the Vehicle Security Alarm success fully arms the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set To Disarm the System To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm you will need to press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or turn the ignition key to the ON position If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle
25. N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 12 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided i should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to ind
26. and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 in 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine oil transmission oil axle transfer case to assure the fluids have not been contami nated Contaminated fluid milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as possible to pre vent component damage 296 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Driving In Snow Mud And Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain forward motion Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads be cause engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the transmission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift int
27. both the front and side airbags may be triggered But even in collisions where the airbags work you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints in this section NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger se
28. change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary I Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 138 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter d Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 453 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or Schedule 150 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate tires l Change the engine oil and engine oil If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Rotate tires Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police
29. or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for chil dren who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit wit
30. the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it 3 will only use the first 24 characters Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add john Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature
31. 15 Rim diameter in inches in NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 321 EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 322 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tiresas mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire
32. 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving CAUTION Continued e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could into any forward gear when the engine is above cause electrocution idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION is firmly on the brake pedal CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Continued NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 285 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON position Always depress the brake pedal first before moving the shift lever out of PARK
33. 426 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 462 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 247 Universal Transmitter 2 2 uui eo dodo ped due DRR 157 Upnolstery Cale PR 418 Vanity NINO sat 5 Rae REA ES 77 ew ees 83 Variance COMPASS 25456544644 Hees RE ER 202 Vehicle Certification Label 22s is b veges a 349 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Venice Loading ass ER EER een tas a warn 323 349 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Veliidle DIG o PE E ee BA DRA 275 427 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video ele gece Vu Coe eee eae Rap eee Sep d S dog 257 Yaseosib Eee OM ae eee ceasing HE ar sens 395 Voice Recognition System VR ies wie te Re rd 112 Warning Flasher Hazard oeeod ono eau eso 372 Mannes Kol Over 2 is mae iss qr ey ead ete 5 10 Be Id Warnings and Cautions osse d en v9 hoe p aot ara sas 8 Warranty Information 0006 460 Washers Windshield 143 400 Washine Velle oos ones ded rete d Pee Rs 416 Waxine and Polisie a sce soo x03 RE n 416 Wheel and Wheel Trim uuu seu 9 Rs 418 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care sss 418 Bel MORE sere nss wees d hades Hu deed 279 Wind BuffellP esce S aceto grex EE P e os 34 166 Wandow POR CIN erretreta xard baie puce Xe ain 274 binh ER ER EER EE OE EE 31 IE Lc Tr e Windshield Defroster 74 263 269 Windshield Washers zu bees eR 143 Ed p20 2 4eees aed SAO HR ER P dde PESE 400
34. 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Connecting The iPod Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connect ing the cable e If the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod
35. 5th 7 5 mph 12 km h e REVERSE 1 mph 1 6 km h e NEUTRAL 2 5 mph 4 km h e PARK HDC will not function HDC also has the capability to sense rough terrain and will automatically adjust to a slightly slower set speed about 0 3 mph 0 5 km h than normal HDC operation can be overridden with brake application to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Conversely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle back to the origi nal set speed NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 317 HDC is intended for low speed off road driving only At vehicle speeds above 30 mph 48 km h HDC will no longer function When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph 48 km h HDC function will automatically resume and the vehicle speed will return to the chosen set speed WARNING HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control ling vehicle speed when descending hills The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed ESP BAS Warning Light And ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is ESP combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS BAS Warning Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They shoul
36. 71 C Om iEE uar bee ses SE AE ES 387 388 389 Compartment Identification 387 388 389 Sul AP 403 Exhaust Gas Caution 38 72 343 Pods LO Ole oi us or 48 BE SUIVRE RE PASE OUE 282 Flooded UIE sco ione cuseens ETT ES 282 Fuel Requirements 244 kak SEP MR Rd 339 436 di ROSE EE OE AE EE EE IE Gas 394 436 OIL hange Interval sus eu gra Oe RE edadia 394 Oil Disposal syne sie aias apua HE SE ogres S 396 Oil Filter ooste HEER EER De RA DEE SE 396 Oil Filter Di pol Ses ea x dE SER ESSA 396 Oil Selection eren 395 436 id die oi eov wax eae CUBE SHE HOUR PE 395 Ai vas RE paana A Satire a ees 372 lt a PMID De TETEE DER 281 Temperature Gape cavecihease waa RAS ean 190 Engine Oil VISCOSITY Maas cea cae ne ie NES es DR 395 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 395 N INDEX 471 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 57 Entry System Illuminated cues 21 Event Data Recorder len 59 Exhaust Gas Caution 38 72 343 401 PXMaUSUOVSICN Baty este ben Mews bee Eid PS 72 401 Extender beat Belt 24 3 soes bie Ee RED 4682 48 Exterior Finish Care a 262458 BIERE GER ano 416 Eetior Li iS xacstpes ques tuns BR AE DAAR DE 7A Filters Air Cleaner 24 AA AO EUG AR AUN Eee s 396 bielie ee ee a RS S ee ee ee eee 396 Enpin Oil Disposal sucus des ree amp 396 Finish Cae 4 0 eee EE TE 39929649939 5 416 ed de 2 aso xao ee RSs S NP d
37. ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 3 Turn Signal Indicator amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has traveled about one mile with the turn signals on a chime will sound to alert you to turn the signals off If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 4 High Beam Indicator Indicates that headlights are on high beam 5 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of C5 an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain c
38. AND OPERATING Se For example your vehicle has a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a tempera ture drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor
39. Available with SmartBeam Only When this feature is selected the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Refer to Lights SmartBeams If Equipped in Section 3 of this manual for more information 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When YES Y is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped When YES Y is selected the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears When NO N is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic d
40. Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type isplay No program type or un N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 16 Digit Character Program Type Display By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next freguency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll raad through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between gt playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button i
41. Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 After you enter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic dow
42. During power operation personal injury or cargo damage may occur Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched before driving away If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is closing the liftgate will reverse to the full open position NOTE e If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is closing or opening the liftgate will automatically reverse to the closed or open position provided it meets sufficient resistance If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate is opening the liftgate motor will disengage to allow manual operation 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING e The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph 0 km h e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the e The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below 22 F 30 C or temperatures above 150 F 65 C Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the liftgate before pressing any of the power liftgate switches vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the e If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions climate control blower switch is set at high sp
43. ER DRA S 29 Door Locks Automatic SS SS 30 Door Opener Garage sea KP BRA HER BR HE DRR 157 L UNE acis re ue saves See OE eS OIE 294 Off Pavement ius soe ai Ee oe aC dune rw e 294 ROIG sussa 943 PER IR EE REO duds E 294 DVD Player Video Entertainment System 257 eed OE ee S499 8 dor E edo E o deg 344 Electrice Remote AMO ia vote vora v SP SEP S 82 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 167 Electronic Brake Control System iu sores 304 Anti Lock Brake System sine SEER RAS EE 304 Brake Assist SYSTEM arasat de pasene RES RS 305 Electronic Roll Mitigation OA e lgceodegue LULLLOMLLLLILUL ILUGELeLLLLL LELUOAG U UPe GLLIIZ lcencCGLIAOe O LO AeA Electronic Stability Program usw dr red 307 Traction Control Systeni lt s xke ese ne Rn 305 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 306 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 148 Electronic Stability Program ESP 307 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 193 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVI sap ie Reine ede Bere ees 191 194 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck s ors ads ages 293 Hazard Warning Flasher iue dt mes 972 JAKO as op er eE AIR KORREK DE 373 lamp Sarn cee ipa Its don 4 ard ph b d d 380 TOW Looks Gueaneousay eo ID ou RU RUE 382 Emission Control System Maintenance 391 440 Engine ie ESRA EE OR OES 396 Block Heater sos siea ss pas EDS HR 283 Break In Recommendations
44. Generation Con Ee Ried elei NGC nietos tI CEA Cm Blue bie ie Eis Only Yellow ORE toe E ec Ste 34 Spare Natural 35 20 Amp Trail Iow Mod Export 44 e Sae Spare Yellow Only 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Underhood Fuses Integrated Power Module ity Fuse e mes Trailer Tow Park Lamps E pem Rt Park Lamps Red 20 Amp Front Control Module Yellow FCM Batt 4 20 Amp _ Front Control Module o ee ica FCM Batt 2 i i P uin 20Amp Adjustable Pedal d RE Yellow Integrated Power Module ME CUP ies Hope ity Fuse Yellow 20 Amp Rear Fog Lamps Ex Yellow port Only 10 Amp Lt Park Lamps Red MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 Fuse T ity Fuse 18 20 Amp Front Control Module 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Yellow FCM Batt 1 Red Controller ORC R S 19 20 Amp Lt Trailer Tow Stop 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Yellow Turn Red Controller ORC R O a Sr d Module VEHICLE STORAGE l If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 20 Amp Rt Trailer Tow Stop 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your Yellow Turn Rek 22 30 Amp Final Drive Control aie EE Pink Module FDCM e Remove fuse 27 in the Intelligent Power Module MOD labeled Ienition Off Draw IOD 1 oe Re e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery 27 15 Amp Ignition Off Draw e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of Blue IOD 1 service i e vacation for two weeks
45. Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily SNOW PLOW Snow plows winches and other aftermarket equipment should not be added to the front end of your vehicle The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the front end structure The airbags could deploy unexpect edly or could fail to deploy during a collision WARNING Do not add a snow plow winches or any other aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle This could adversely affect the functioning of the airbag system and you could be injured RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing 2WD Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe transmission damage 366 STARTING AND OPERATING M Towing Quadra Trac I9 Single Speed Transfer Case 4WD Models Recreational towing is not allowed This model does not have a NEUTRAL position in the transfer case Towing Quadra Trac lle Quadra Drive lIe 4WD Models CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing NOTE The transfer case must be in the NEUTRAL position and the transmission must be in the PARK position for recreational towing Shifting Into NEUTRAL Use the following proce
46. If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off See your authorized dealer for service EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C5 nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a
47. KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil Speedpass additional RKE transmit ters or any other transponder equipped components on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional part is physically held against the RKE transmitter being used to start the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other RF electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once an RKE transmitter is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans mitters Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank transmitter t
48. L C D D LL L L L L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 447 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter m L Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 448 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Service Schedule L1 Change the engi
49. Only the headlights will illuminate during this time Refer to EVIC Cus tomer Programmable Features in Section 4 to turn this feature On Off or set the time interval 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Lights The interior lighting consists of courtesy lights mounted below the instrument panel reading lights located above the front and rear doors and a rear cargo light Opening a door or turning the center of the multifunction lever to the extreme up position will activate all interior courtesy lights Courtesy Reading Lights Each light can be turned on by pressing the recessed area of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area of the lens a second time There are also reading lights located above the rear doors Each light can be turned on Courtesy Reading Lights by pressing the front recessed area of the lens To turn these lights off press the recessed area of the lens a second time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The front and rear wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the right side control lever Turn the end of the control lever to select Low High or one of the five speed sensitive intermittent windshield wiper speeds Refer to Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System in this section For information on the rear wiper and washer refer to Rear Window Features in this section Windshield
50. Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until HomeLink 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAIN ING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seco
51. SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3
52. The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cool ing System Pressure Cap paragraph 14 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter later in this section 15 TOW HAU
53. This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passenger side airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 81c1b7ed 1 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag 3 Knee Bolster NOTE The front airbags are certified to the Federal regulations that allow less forceful deployment 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity and occupant size This vehicle is equipped with window bags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow They are located above the side windows Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG 022606178 Window Airbag Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are no longer functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are WARNING Continued e Do not have any accessory item
54. a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs are not as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING Continued e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your ab domen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt
55. at least five seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Voice Tree Main Menu l Towing English UConnect Francais Last See Number Pianebook See Setup on Phone Eloweha Flowchart is redialed Number The 32 name language associated Number specific phonebook will be with entry is Dialed used The phones paired is dialed are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed ans Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Current Number is played Enter Location Enter Number New Entry Added Phonebook Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation Towing Confirmation airing Emergency Selec Une anguage Emergency rm Confirmation Say 4 digit System Lists pin code Phones S elect phone to be deleted HEE Mones Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing New phone Select a language wil English Espanol temporarily or Francais Prompts on ott override phone priorities Syslem Syslem Lisls oe
56. ates 4 sare ET ET SEE OD wears a 347 Power SICGIING osse oaachpattaecie dass 299 Radiator Coolant Pressure 406 Car Washes awe is Wah wee HORS abortu ee SOR 416 Carbon Monoxide Warning ss niek oa e ms a 72 343 Cargo Area Features xs se exon 644 oa Ve 173 Car p Compartment ssas teas oe EE 173 Luggage Carrier usos 2 434 RA X4 93 es 176 10 oS Id Cao Logd HO es si aat raas eae ieee ronem 173 Cargo Vehicle Loading 273 es EER ARE 349 Cellular Phone leen 84 261 Center High Mounted Stop Light 435 Ceruiication LA0e 46 04 55 09 5 tiis bodes 349 Chains Tire ASA AE 92 OES IE ON IE 43 327 CHaneme A Flat TNE sey chen ee HERE ERKEN SS 373 e die EE ereer e aar 320 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Pra eee pee 0 a pe en ew aoe x 391 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 71 dieci ene Gog 71 Child Restraint aa 61 62 67 69 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 66 67 Child alebr LOCKS sarsie oo ey Oo ord a ee als 30 Climate C ODnHOL si o9 X 999 cue oa P eee ERA 261 Sol q r 210 224 228 237 Cold Weather Operation a uu v soe dto ie c 282 Command View Skylights lt i esp ug ee y ES 166 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 260 Sonpl RP 201 Compass Calibration isi kie masiga aoe oa RR 202 Compass VAAN 2 Seda cages ones Seka nea 202 Computer Tap Travel si osse RR t es herders 199 Connector us TEE OT EE TEE OE ET
57. audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Play Mode e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the button long enough will take you to the beginning following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the of the current track ia ae iPod and display data e Jump forward in the current track by pressing and e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or holding the FF gt gt button Dievious tuos e Asingle press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will m e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while jump backward or forward respectively for five playing a track skips to the next track seconds e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one e Use the lt lt SEEK and SE
58. beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your v
59. buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up squeeze on the handle and lift Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate 81605ae2 Liftgate Release WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your pas sengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Liftgate Flipper Glass The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push up on the window switch located on the liftgate 81605ae9 Liftgate Glass Release To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass will automatically rise Once the liftgate flipper glass has been opened connec tion to the rear window wiper is interrupted preventing activation of the rear wiper blade while the flipper glass is open WARNINCG Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Power Liftgate If Equipped The power liftgate may be opened manually or x by pressin
60. but can Automatic Operation Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature be overridden knobs for Comfort Blower Preferred Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for Comfort Mode Preferred and Set mode knob to any desired Automatic Although Manual automatic User selectable User selectable Manual Air Temperature air delivery point Adjust Auto Lo or Hi can be control of air temperature outside or A C on or off Control Temperature knobs to select selected a manually is disabled User must recirculated the desired temperature selected airflow level adjust temperature is reccommend for knobs to obtain the the optimum comfort desired temperature Manual automatic User selectable User selectable control of air temperature outside or A C on or off is disabled User must recirculated adjust temperature knobs to obtain the desired temperature Full Manual Set blower knob to any desired Manual Operation airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Adjust Temperature knobs to select the desired temperature Manual Air Temperature Control Operation When the Mode knob is set to any position other than Auto the Temperature knob operates in the non automatic comfort condition The n
61. channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account at no addi tional charge For further information call the toll free N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at WWW sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the Tune Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the Tune Scroll control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any butto
62. diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 9V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts 462 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C e Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and e
63. driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Elec Continued tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 315 HDC Hill Descent Control 4WD Models With NV245 Two Speed Transfer Case Only HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during off road driving situations and is available in 4WD LOW range only To enable HDC transfer case must be in 4WD LOW range press the HDC switch If the HDC switch is pressed when the vehicle is not in 4WD LOW range the light in the switch will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled Hill Descent Switch 316 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE When HDC is properly enabled the message HILL DESCENT CONTROL will appear in the EVIC and the light in the switch will be illuminated HDC will auto matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed when necessary HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only activate when the vehicle is descending a hill It will usually not activate on level ground The HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the trans mission gear selected e 1st 1 mph 1 6 km h e 2nd 2 5 mph 4 km h e 3rd 4 mph 6 km h e 4th 5 5 mph 9 km h e
64. fatalities if you are not prop erly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision which includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Continued 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e Research has shown that seat belts save lives and WARNING e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out belts are designed to go around the large bones of yo
65. from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The uconnect phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the uconnect phone from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into
66. however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm You may also accidentally disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights come on when you open any door or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to un lock any door They will remain on for about 30 seconds after all doors are closed then fade to off The lights also will fade to off if you turn on the ignition after you close all the doors 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a handheld Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving the v
67. in 1 02 mm Lower Bank FR8T1332 Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine ZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Fuel Selection 3 7L and 4 7L Engine 87 Octane Fuel Selection 5 7L Engines 7 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Transfer Case NV140 Single Speed MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Only Transfer Case NV245 Two Speed MOPAR NV 247 245 Transfer Case Lubricant Only Axle Differential Front Rear MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 API GL5 or equivalent with friction modifier additive Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir This system requires the use of MOPAR Hydraulic System Power Steer ing Fluid P N 05142893AA or equivalent which meets Chrysler Material Standard MS 10838 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emissions Control System Maintenance 440 D Required Maintenance Intervals W Maintenance Schedule 441 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE T
68. is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6 To release the belt push the red button marked PRESS comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its will withdraw any slack in the belt stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down Poo 4 1 OES Pre the webbing to allow it to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc RES ER E EE Removing Slack from Belt NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Press the RELEASE button to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that serves you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if
69. jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can dam age the winch When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice and slippery areas 376 WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever into PARK 4 Turn OFF the ignition 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear C wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and shift a automatic transmission into PARK or a manual transmission into REVERSE Continued WARNING Continued Never start or run
70. of normal operation Most of the time when in Automatic operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation mode by pressing the Recirculation button How ever under certain conditions in automatic the system is blowing air out of the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and remain off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 mode at this time If you would like to go to Recircu lation mode you must first move your mode knob to Panel Panel Floor or Floor then press the Recircu lation button This feature will reduce the possibility of window fogging Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic with Manual Air Temperature Control and Manual This means the customer can override the blower mode and disable Automatic Tem perature Control completely NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart below for details 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Automatic Temperature Control Operation The System will Mode Air Temperature Air Recirculation A C Operation Blower Control Control Control Control Operation Full Automatic Set blower knob to either Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic
71. or more run the 28 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Yellow IOD 2 in the fresh air and high blower setting This will 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type Clove Dor LORE oe ee ARE RR RR ome 194 Grap Handle LEM eace seid teg a gt ae es L002825W5W Overhead Console Reading Lights VT4976 Rear Cargo Lig UE soes shot ow eR ana MOE 214 2 Visor Vanity LIE BE sea accio ewe Ode ww a V26377 Underpanel Courtesy Lights amp a 1a unm 906 Instrument Cluster General Illumination 103 Teltale Hazard Light i sce e aem o E Wes 74 Available only from authorized dealers Exterior Lights Bulb Type Backup IGS 3293 3 5 BRAD ES 3057K Pront Fog LIONG Dx 9145 Front Park Turn Light 444 si GE N breton gs 31574A Fontoide Marker 3 8 ss id Boks RE PR W5W Headlights Low Beam x 3 aia 54599 rine ka 9006 Headlights High Beam 0 9005 Rear Turn Stop Tail Lights 3057K NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT Head Light 1 Open the hood 2 Remove the headlamp cover N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429
72. or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 461 To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washing ton D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme
73. other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this sec tion for the correct fluid type Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 CAUTION Continued Fluid Level Check 3 7L Engine Regular fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted e The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating If you notice fluid loss or shift lever malfunction have conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe CAUTION e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque damage to the transmission may occur Your au
74. screen pan scan and letter box 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equip
75. seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following 16 Digit Character format types trograni Lype Display 16 Digit Character Dip News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next freguency Program Type No program type or un defined one Jazz Jazz 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select
76. secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow 360 STARTING AND OPERATING M e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GIW 3 GAWR 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK For ZONE dun Er t EEG four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded Do not attemp
77. sound If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat provid ing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur by any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 333 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE e If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON a TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will be displayed in the instrument cluster for 60 seconds and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assem
78. take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack whic
79. taxi fleet Replace the top row of spark plugs off road or frequent trailer towing 4 7L Engine Inspect the CV joints Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and Inspect exhaust system 5 7L Engines Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 454 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNINCG You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or bidon c 457 Speech Impaired TDD TTY 459 O Prepare For The Appointment 457 O Service Contrat 64 e5 d hueso doe Proben RS 459 APrepare it 3039
80. than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx Id e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessaty e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
81. the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power Inverter 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools Due to built in overload protection the power outlet will shut down if the power rating is exceeded Each device to be powered should be checked first to make sure it does not exceed the outlet s 150 Watts maximum rating Press the power inverter switch located on the upper switch bank to turn the power on to the outlet Press the switch again to turn the power off Power Inverter Switch NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 NOTE CUPHOLDERS e When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the inverter status indicator turns ON The status indica tor of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power Front Cupholders In the center console there are two cupholders for the front seat passengers e Due to built in overload protection the inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If
82. the situation POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system N STARTING AND OPERATING 299 WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check The power steering system requires the use of MOPAR Hydraulic System Power Steering
83. time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 uconnect studios SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV IF EQUIPPED Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting technology to provide streaming video The subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio SIRIUS Back seat TV offers three video channels for family enter tainment directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska Refer to your Video Entertainment System VES RER Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de tailed operating instructions VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SALES CODE XRV IF EQUIPPED The optional VES Video Entertainment System con sists of a LCD liquid crystal display screen a battery powered remote control and two headsets Refer to your VES User s Manual for detailed operating instructions 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See The LCD screen is located on the headliner behind the front seats Rib e ep ae la o a a 4 m A 4 e eee n a d e En 8161d54e Remote Control Location Lowering the Display Screen N
84. when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 km after a three hour period Refer to the Tires General Infor mation in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold tire pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the up dated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information 330 STARTING
85. will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the 338 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of t
86. with the flipper glass open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle Express Down Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for detai
87. you are taller than average you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode The Automatic Locking mode should be used anytime a child safety seat is installed in a second or third row seating position Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in a rear seat whenever possible 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive Emer gency Locking mode Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retra
88. your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 7 A q X De AI ae gD RE WATER IN FUEL NM nn nm TURN SIGNALS E SENT Wi FAILURE i i ice CY z P a CQ ik D e si da OD oy n l BRAKE SYSTEM FUEL ROAR TANDIN WINDEHELD MASTER LIGHTING RET ACTIVATE ER uu nd WINDOW LET TIRE PRESSURE m d a INTERMITTENT WIPER WABHER SATEH POWER OUTLET MONITOR FII aa TT ii UM m Qe Em AWD O x 4 i FUEL FILL EDE REARWIMDOW WIMDSHELD WASHER DOME LIGHT PROAT FOG LIGHT HOOO RELEASE LOWER AJR RECIRCULATION COMVERTIELE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE DF AMTHOCH WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET 4 WINDOW DOA CONTROL DRIVE BAAN SYSTEM me z 7i On e ii Qz O C apf a Ds KA AWD BRAKE WINDESHIELU LIFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGIME WL REAR WANDOM CLOGCTRI ALLT REAR FOG LAMP ARE TREE DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAM WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE PR WHFFI WARNIM Ge DEFROST HEATED INFR KE CHITI FT CONTROL Der REAKF an e TOWI SBETASSORLAS BATTERY HEATED MIAROR sae BEAT BELT SUDNC GOA en AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT UA CN WARNING TOW I HALAL CHARGING TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON ry ej e 40 OO W Pt D u LOW CATER ANCHORS SLOW PLUG WARIDSHIELD WIFER SIDE AREG AIRBAG LIGHTER AND IEIHEH FOR UCONMEL I HAZARD FOU WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER Re EER HANDLE CHADREN LATCH BUTTON DERE LOW Ei o C E ZR AIRBAG a atit Ti Ld MALFUNCTION TRANE ERAIME COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE SEE OWNERS IHCSCATOR LIGHT ML TEMP T
89. 223 9089 939 59 Go S 457 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 460 D Be Reasonable With Requests 47 WB MOPAR Parte ssa ERRERS Rs 460 H If You Need Assistance 0 457 W Reporting Safety Defects 460 O Chrysler LLC Customer Center 458 O In The 50 United States And Washington O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 458 SEE EEE BY ROTORS eee re rubr Tee m 9 Hin M xico Contact 64255 2243054 RE RES 458 ae toss Ronee hae dd B Publication Order Forms 461 456 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Se lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire El Tall ads PPP 463 Quality Grades m 462 O Treadwear 2h AO ERA OES 463 ETemperatire Grades aes sce needa eee 464 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 457 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a numbe
90. 247 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 247 Console Overhead eres 157 Contract Service kn ae ks died bs wee A siada 459 COMMS SVStCM Geen ax s dca dados EO ET ON 403 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 3 a3 ER HERE 405 COGN Capacity 4 444b4 nb four ERA OR cans 436 DOOM LeVel c0ducgueuneevatuena N ees 407 Disposal of Used Coolant 407 Drain Flush and Refill 22 2 k Ege 404 seno rernm 403 Pots tO Remember a za e xx ames 408 BE ES ME ETER es dE NE SU s 406 Nn INDEX 469 GE sade RES OE eae oes EER 406 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 404 436 Courtesy TICKS P 142 SE EE EE OE OR He ds 192 SUDNOIGERS 955544665 ADEL to he PEER PG 171 Customer Assistance eee 457 Data Recorder Event 422 22 Sat e Bas rers 59 Daytime Running Lights 05 04 sos cee BEN GER 138 Dealer Service 2 ok aa a ie bs ROER Ed 3 393 Defroster Rear Window 175 Defroster Windshield 74 263 269 Diagnostic System Onboard 390 Dimmer Switch Headlight sae soe dees VERRE 141 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 413 OIERSING 43444440064 ae OES eae PR 394 lower let ss ase Ep ntes HR ena ee deos 299 Disabled Vehicle Towing iese se se se 383 Disarming Ihelt VSEBI 4062005 im 9 PERK oe tan 21 Disposal Eise Old otieeeua so pnaeonergas ce RS 396 Lied Endine ds oscuteren te trii Era 396 Door LOCKS ss 3430455744466 40 RP
91. 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that may be recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning lamp status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Airbag disable lamp status if equipped e Time of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 e Airbag deployment level if applicable e Impact acceleration and angle e Seat belt status e Brake status service and parking brakes e Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed e Transmission gear selection e Cruise control status e Traction stability control status e Tire Pressure Monitoring System status Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost la
92. 445444 shane ES 400 DE did ele 2392999 5E cya eg os 401 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M O Cooling System O Brake System O Front Rear Axle Fluid s a ie EER EDE Bes D Transfer Case O Automatic Transmission o Maintenance After Off Road Driving D Appearance Care And Protection From COMOsION ase EES AE EA N Hop SON E Og ER N Fuses D Interior Fuses D Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center O Underhood Fuses Integrated Power Module aM Vehicle Storage caecum m rom RR 427 W Replacement Bulbs 428 W Bulb Replacement uude e dr eo ss 428 ae Ak geregi ry see D 428 Prone Turtwiga gs ee tee esa ee eee 430 EE out POS LIONE asses vee hee EO Sees 432 D Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup Lights ciis ees 433 O Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 435 B Fluids And Capacities 436 W Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 437 EI GE NG C aw ee ae ee MES 437 PIC DAS osse de ae oe bee ee Ee SA eee ae 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L D 9 9 OPE 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Battery 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Power Distribution Center 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Integrated Power Module 10 Air Cleaner Filter 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 4 7L dd 071306991 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Battery 2 Aut
93. 55 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or as 9 sistance 033906001 Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan HomeLink Buttons gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can rity Alarm is active cause serious injury or death NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes sage states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the hand held transmitter button until the EVIC di
94. 8bds3 Power Window Switches The power window switches remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switch have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for 10 min utes after the ignition has been turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection Driver s and Front Passenger Door Only Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE If the window runs into any obstacle during the auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obs
95. 9 10 476 INDEX M Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren GRICE oos ER SS RARR RE PRESE EE REX 66 67 Libricalion Dody sies ase RR bie sna HR EE 399 Luggage Rack Roof Rack Ls 176 L nipdPOUDDOR asi pa ARK OER gatas Hi 119 Maintenance Free Battery sist seke prr dod 997 Maintenance Procedures 2 45222 qua gene hu ed 394 Maintenance Schedule eem omm tn 441 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 187 391 Manual Service 9a ooh hy qox eR 461 Memory Feature Memory Seat 129 Memory DEEL srdaca dd ERA cd Rubus Sd RR ce 129 Memory Seats and Radio saveeceandeas Yee es 129 Mimi Hip C OnDUIGE sesegan oed arare SAREL De 199 MIGE PCT oe Coe rr 80 Automatic DIMMING si a vache oie en SA EERS 80 Elec Powerd ous hau spe DRR Fe N ER DES 82 Elecliie Keindle a ux doa dox que ed aera 4 98 4 ERR 82 Bxtenmor old aa acerca d eie St eae ins HERE 82 Heated EnEn SO WALS ERAS ROER OES 83 Outside SARA RE AA EO EE NG OK 81 Rearview ME EE N ORE ES 80 poire 83 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Monitor Tire Pressure System sers kem s 329 WIG Pat Pals soas aud PEU DAE BRA EER 393 460 Multi Function Control Lever 135 New Vehicle Break In Period 71 Occupant Restraints sos iese mene N RR here d 99 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 339 340 Odometer 25a e ok do owe E RUSO HE Re ee 191 192 WO p TE ea OE OE he EE Oe OE 191 Off Pavement Driving Off Road
96. 9 99x3 18 Service Assistance eee 457 Service Contact aus GE ERA AR ES HER ERED ES 459 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 0 SS 187 Service Manuals at 452 bee beeen E STA 461 Setting the Clock sisse as os RE AR 210224228297 oetune S Personal aa aos e ees os Rd Eso HER eae d 203 Shift Lock Manual Override 285 SUNS ee e e EE ee M VE EE 284 Automatic Transmission LL 284 SHoulder Bells s secre how m oa ER RES a EE 40 oenas TEER s sas SR REK REKEN 74 140 186 430 433 Sirius Backseat TV uconnect studios 207 Skylights Command View sess 166 Nn INDEX 481 SmartBeams G4 05 5 2000s eas eae ews EE 136 Snow Chains Tire Chains 327 Snow Plow lt lt 4 449 DEE ao beg doe pee ei 365 pare LG ese BRESLER SE HAARD 374 Specifications Fuel Gasoline iv R ER ke DEE DE ERK 999 0 Mv 395 Speed Control Cruise Control eseis ness irr 148 DPCCUOMCICN 2442400648 a4 ah ot Rs SR ee oe 185 eie oude ER EE EO EET eae d ps 27 281 Automatic Transmission Se 281 Cold Weather asc 44 04 Srt fs rd 282 283 Engine Block Heater uu exc msc ode 283 Ei mie Fails to Ad oe vataeearversuergeert 282 Remote 4 64646 aped HA deg MR ee d bo es 27 Steering o 45444444445 VRESE DA ERA 298 299 Tit Column ises ses ode n HR ie ME enda 146 Wheel ii RE EE EE ERG 5 146 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Son Pr bas eas IE HE 259 Jc
97. ATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated uconnect phone Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for uconnect phone operating instruc tions for these radios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate uconnect phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone NOTE e The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Version 0 96 or higher See the uconnect website for supported phones For uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e WWw jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 uconnect allows you to transfer calls between the sys tem and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that ena
98. Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Iowing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally re
99. Belt Anchorage o Automatic Locking Mode If Equipped O Energy Management Feature NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 O Seat Belt Pretensioners 47 D Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Belle MM 47 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 48 Heat Bet EXCH uacuum veto dr ded ends 48 O Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS 49 O Child Restraints 2 2x 2399 SES 61 N Engine Break In Recommendations 71 W Safety Tips cause EER REEDE ANS RE KERE a gt 71 O Transporting Passengers seks RE e EE Ed 71 2 EME did DOGS Vus sag pe ee HA DEE Bone d 12 O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The bon m rU RA MR DEE HER AAS Pe 79 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle saeco hee PES pe bate 74 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter with integrated ignition key and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the double sided key into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The detented positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring load
100. Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names n nm e Level 1 12 includ
101. C displays the following messages e TURN SIGNAL ON e PERFORM SERVICE e DAMAGED KEY KEY DOES NOT COMMUNI CATE e KEY NOT PROGRAMMED KEY NOT PRO GRAMMED 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se WRONG KEY KEY DOES NOT BELONG TO VEHICLE KEY NOT PROGRAMMED EXCEEDED KEY PRO GRAM LIMIT PROGRAMMING ACTIVE NEW KEY PRO GRAMMED SERVICE SECURITY KEY DRIVER PASSENGER DOOR OPEN with graphic LEFT RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN with graphic X DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE DOOR OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGLASS OPEN with graphic HOOD OPEN with graphic HOOD DOOR OPEN with graphic HOOD DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFTGATE HOOD OPEN with graphic HOOD GLASS DOOR OPEN with graphic HOOD GLASS DOORS OPEN with graphic HOOD GATE DOOR OPEN with graphic HOOD GATE DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFIGLASS DOOR OPEN with graphic LIFIGLASS DOORS OPEN with graphic LIFIGLASS HOOD OPEN with graphic WASHER FLUID LOW with graphic COOLANT LOW with graphic NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 OIL CHANGE REQUIRED OIL CHANGE RESET CHECK GAUGES AUTO HIGH BEAMS ON AUTO HIGH BEAMS OFF PARK ASSIST DISABLED SERVICE SUSPENSION SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP CHECK SHIFT PROCEDURE SERVICE 4WD SYSTEM AWD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING LIMIT SPEED CHECK GASCAP ESP OFF IOD FUSE OUT HILL DESCENT CON
102. DE OWEN 4 6484 ad c ved irish ae eoe 135 Ifc CPC 428 Headlights On With Wipers 136 Hien Beam MACION a a a sua aot dob dob REK BR 4 186 Ll an quaa irse ENUY sedasie BREAD SERE 21 Instrument Cluster SS 135 139 InbrlOP 2 423 20x x DRS 3909 HER OE ER Ka 139 142 Lights On Reminder as gm qd ER actore tes 140 Low Fuel 24 322453 2 fescckA X43 33 PS 194 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 187 BIBI SON TE OE N EE ED 188 ccc 445 TE 141 RAGIN oo ues aep Rot WEN S SCR sre sone E 142 edi ok NE PN 433 Red Wall RE OE OE EE AN 433 Seat Belt Reminder 192 N INDEX 475 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 188 uc a ane bebe eee bane eee epee nea 428 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 187 Side Marker as bis ce 9d Sh ER REKE ESE 433 SIMALIBCAINS a exGobuwu ac e ee PAS KS DES 136 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 189 Tow Haul Indicator 191 Traction Control xu oues s AR HERES SEGUE 317 Torni Signal ons caacee ene ers 74 135 140 430 433 Nae MIOT ee ie asare terar tae d gute EEN 83 ro EE 199 Load Hoor EO aerae enin dX DRAKE HR Panes 179 Loading Nebuele 425545 4452 ooe ene one HEDE 349 TO eare RES OE AE EE AE AE NAS 029 LOCKS gon Goo Gee eee ee Ger ees EE NE 29 Automate DOOR ic qx Ke sexus RE ee oe E S 30 Child Protection 4 005 444 8446 6 44 644 Sada eg 30 DOOR ROES ER HE ER EE EE es EO 29 Power DOOF 6 6665 e446 ESE KERE ER EE 2
103. E E 272 Hazard WOENS sege direnker EE ED AR eae n 9 2 Jum Signal shear eae hod as 74 186 430 433 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Craine ROMPE viua tenn caeeeeoe caine ES 346 EMCI Wil sa vase eos e 4 HEER cae ea as 346 Fuel Requirements 522 9 es 344 345 Replacement Paris sis dco eene Res cee oa ae 347 rnm p AP rrr 346 Flipper Glass Liftgate son ist rx ER PTS ERES 35 Flooded Engine Starting sae x sd ARE KERE 4 282 Pad apaties arriere repre HORSE ELE 436 Fd Heike os ETE eee eee ee Bee eee 74 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 412 413 Bike cs eee eden shee ed oe ee SEU RUE UR E 409 Faeie Ol PC 394 Power SICCIING 5 5448 ehAatboettae che dees 209 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 437 Fog Light Denice 44 gece cee oe Gated aoa des 432 POTIONS sasie ona Eee oe PUR es 138 193 432 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat 124 Folding Sean DEAE das pak 19 a8 tra ary ties 124 128 Four Way Hazard Flasher issu 372 10 472 INDEX M Freeing A Stuck Vehicle sa SR ies cae 293 Front Axle Differential 410 Front Heated Seats ss ss SS eee 120 lu T 299 Fillet Cap Gas Gap s ade 99 ux P3 eee 347 Easoliii 11x 39 7503 2 REG eet ee eae RSS 999 fob M ARE BAAR REDE RE REEKS SR DS 193 Materials Added 0 0 00 eee 342 Octane RAUDE oo oes E ono oh ee owes 339 340 ROQUICIICNNS Gis see seb 293 BAD 4 dut Cosa 436 lank Capacity ciero ray hx oe
104. E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls Back View of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM TAPE raad CD Etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the
105. EATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 e It is not recommended to store similar sounding e low to medium vehicle speed names in the uconnect phonebook e lo
106. EFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on fo
107. EK gt gt buttons to jump to the click during the first two seconds of the track will previous or next track If the SEEK button is jump to the previous track in the list Turning this pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will button at any other time in the track will jump to jump to the previous track in the list if you press this the beginning of the current track button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See e While a track is playing press the INFO button to see Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is the associated metadata Artist track title album etc showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps ON to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to e Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod de OTe eae cue ne a e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions e Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which in a similar manner as the scr
108. EMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TO DOWN TOP UF MANUAL HO 070505550 8 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on a label located on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equip ment VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove the VIN label i e 010807118 N INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS EN A Word About Your Keys suae ese RR 14 D Wireless Ignition Node WIN 14 H Integrated Ignition Key sss 15 o Ignition Key Removal 15 O Key In Ignition Reminder
109. ERATING Se TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram ES EE c SS 055703771 These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving Refer to Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 of this manual More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed NOTE The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the correct vehicle position following a tire rotation NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 329 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 11 C This means that
110. G YOUR VEHICLE Sx of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check the engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion pr
111. HICLE Se CAUTION Continued e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using the Rear Camera system to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using the Rear Camera system NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning the Rear Camera On or Off With Navigation Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Press the camera setup soft key 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 5 Press the save soft key 6 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 7 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again Turning the Rear Camera On or Off Without Navigation Radio 1 Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 4 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an im
112. ID GE sesse dde e ee RES 17 Sev Reminder age PERD 440 624 680442444 17 Keyless Entity D USIEI es resa deia geom dac dde putet 22 APE ETE EE EET ONE 14 L p Sho lder Bells sesse 4G v RE EE EIE Mi 40 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CRMC is 44444654445 4628 445550455 66 67 lud PPP 74 Lead Free Gasoline pesaga cor arde wade eee Pers at 339 Leaks Fid eo oe 2 ee ee ES S DiE oe TES 74 lnc sae SEER BERE EER ASE WER SAP AN 34 Litteate Php per Glass ee ea s ze eieaa ve eR e 35 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 174 ight Bulk P 74 Br PMID 74 135 bur P RP oar RAK PD HE RE ARE 58 73 187 AMPLO JM RE ees EE TEE OER N 187 Automatic Headli bie s cs 42444 re eb s 136 Beek Up a ee rekes ee ee TS S 433 Dattery Gaver oue T3 54545004 fue EE ER 140 Brake Assist Warning sa aie id yates Hie pes d 317 Brake Warming ria E es ae Rx sidere SE 185 Bulb Replacement o 33 Sors cob ERLA RR RES 428 Center Mounted Stop 24 0402 00000408404 e 435 Courtesy Read xus s ips Ed DRAAD a xS 142 CHIESE er ee ee ee ee ree 192 Davi Me RUNDE 3 a6 ea an ipta e ner d vp 138 Dimmer Switch Headlight 135 141 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 317 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 199 ligo C EE ET EET ERK 74 DOS dogs PRE KAR SEED EDE 138 193 432 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 192 OT ENE ee tee ee eed Rene ee 420 Hazard Warning Flasher 372 Liead DES
113. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Continued 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M For best possible performance your air conditioner e Battery posts terminals and related accessories should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands at the start of each warm season This service should after handling include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt condition should also be checked at this CAUTION time WARNING e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and identified on the battery case If a fast charger is used while battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other u
114. J 3 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 7 Liters 4 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 5 7 Liters 5 7 Liter Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 7L and 4 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 12 7 Quarts 11 8 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula Without Rear Heat 3 7L and 4 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 13 2 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula With Rear Heat 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 14 4 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula Without Rear Heat 5 7 Liter Engine MOPAR Engine Coolant Antifreeze 15 8 Liters 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula With Rear Heat Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil 3 7L 4 7L and Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of 5 7L Engine Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Oil Filter 3 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Oil Filter P N 05184231AA or equivalent Oil Filter 4 7L and 5 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Oil Filter P N 04884899AB or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Spark Plugs 4 7L Engine Upper Bank FR8TE2 Gap 0 040
115. Jeep COMMANDER 2009 owner s manual VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler LLC Copyright 2008 Chrysl
116. L Indicator Light This light will illuminate when the TOW re HAUL button has been selected The TOW HAUL button is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls 16 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stabil ESP ity Program ESP is combined with Brake BAS Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Lamp comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN 17 4WD LOW Mode Indicator If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the 4WD LOW mode The front and rear drive shafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 18 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver or fr
117. Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported N DH UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names n nm e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize
118. Module SCCM Cluster R S BUX Trailer Tow MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 Underhood Fuses Power Distribution Center Cav Cartridge Mini Description o Fuse Fuse P 40 Amp HID Headlamps Green 50 Amp PTC Heater 2 Diesel Red Only 30 Amp Power Outlets Pink D 50 Amp PTC Heater 3 Diesel Red Only in 30 Amp Cig Ter Trail Tow Eg SR Pink Batt Power Distribution Center P ser AE oer Green mander Only E ANNE ty Fuse Fuse Green 20 Amp Front Power Windows Blue 50 Amp PTC Heater 1 Diesel Red Only 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ity Fuse Fuse ity Fuse Fuse PERI We im daad ee s di NEE ee ee Poem Rear Window Defroster Yellow Green EBL Heated Mirror mg 20 Amp ICM A C Clutch 30 Amp Rear HVAC If Yellow Pink Equipped 23 25 Amp _ Power Inverter js f _ Spare Natural 50 Amp 24 20 Amp Rear Heated Seats Red Yellow 30 Amp ABS Pump Pas 20 Amp Final Drive Control Pink Yellow Module FDCM 18 40 Amp Accessory Delay Seats 1 15 Amp Brake Lamps Green Blue MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 Cav Cartridge Mini Description Cav Cartridge Mini Dee ies ity Fuse Fuse P ity Fuse Fuse P 27 20 Amp HD Washer If 396 jJ Spare Yellow Equipped Export 37 20 Amp Ignition Switch Only Yellow ao o 30 Amp ABS Valves 38 20 Amp HID Left Green Yellow 29 20 Amp PCM Batt Gasoline 39 20 Amp HID Right Yellow Only Yellow 30 Spare ve 40 25 Amp Next
119. ND us iene eg ence esas Pap eos D Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or c i1 TTD Hit Engine Pails Io DU sewe 3 ope xS LS pter ate scencke stit tesa OR EI N Engine Block Heater If Equipped Bl Automatic Transmission O Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 281 281 282 282 283 283 284 285 LH Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override O Five Speed Automatic Transmission OGear Ranges o Rocking The Vehicle E On Road Driving Tips ll Off Road Driving Tips O When To Use 4WD Low Range If Equipped sis d O Driving Through Water 278 STARTING AND OPERATING xe O Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 296 O ESP Electronic Stability Program 307 GIDEON NE cic ee0eeeeuen ees he oes 296 o TSC Trailer Sway Control seems EE 912 oO Traction Downhill 2 a6ebsa0eee en bes 297 D HSA Hill Start Assist AWD Models With 3 After Driving Off Road sess 297 ee di EO oe W Power Steering 3 aout iced ts EP EROS pees RE 298 d jets EE Divi gti O Power Steering Fluid Check ssec 24 299 OO erann ea A BEER E 315 M akino Brake oae ERR Up Ed axes 300 O ESP BAS Warning Light And ESP TCS Mi Anti Lock Brake System issus 301 a sea OES SERED See me ii W Electronic Brake Control System 304 SE Saenger ie 5 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 304 DIEMI DES sees dege bees EED ds 318 OTCS Traction Control System
120. P C 427 DIDIIPS Velde e satus posi d Ron d axes 275 427 Dione Xour VEMICIS s ssas TR 09 9 raria qh teni 427 DULL KOOL duod RE sass HO RI on eee eee 164 Dun Visor EXTENSION uoce p44 Eg Gao ie OS Boi EL 83 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 49 Sway Control Trailer as eux PAS EP OER ER ue 912 DVBEeUC EUPIBE ON ss dco quor dro ESSE N 395 oystem Remote Staring cosses me ER ERA e da 27 TACHOMCICE cereri erue ORE OER hei 188 Telescoping Steering Column sei ser per 146 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 264 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 190 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 66 Thet sien ANS oeste acted a ios RA ERA 20 Theft System Disarming 244405045444 RENS 21 10 Ot Id Ti Secon COM soa wens tea Pee SO ee a 146 Time Delay Headlight eR tee ti 141 Tire and Loading Information Placard 323 Tire Identification Number TIN 322 De Markings 2059964 EES RR ER 2 PE SR ER 318 dire Satety Information 3 4 3 2 9t Rg RR 318 ji is ER 74 462 ERROR REENEN ONSE Goce ee 327 By n AE E E ner eas 373 ei EE EER TA ORE EE SE EET 37 3 Load Capaciiy a s oe EE RED ORE DRR EE 323 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 329 Pressure Warning Light 189 OUI GENE EEATT TTT TETTERE TETTEST 462 ROUGON EER OE EE EEA 328 co 4 CPP 318 AT OE EE OE GETOETS 320 xor irs Hie soe vane dy PER epee eat RR 374 Wheel MOning
121. P N 05142893AA or equivalent which meets Chrysler Mate rial Standard MS 10838 WARNING Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF or other types of power steering fluids when servicing the power steering system of this vehicle Damage to the power steering system can result from the use of the wrong power steering fluid Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer 300 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces PARKING BRAKE To set the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will light To release the parking brake pull up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely NOTE The Brake Warning Light indicates only that the parking brake is applied It does not indicate the degre
122. SE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Only 2nd gear 3 7L engine or 3rd gear 4 7L and 5 7L engines will be available in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at a calibrated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may re sult in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a calibrated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in Overdrive and in DRIVE NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usu ally after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Manually shifting using the ERS shift control between 4 direct gear and 5 D Overdrive gear positions will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive For vehicles with 4 7L or 5 7L engines which have two Overdrive gears the transmission may not shift into the top Overdriv
123. STRUMENT PANEL Se The rear temperature blower speed and mode control NOTE The rear climate control system cannot be con can be adjusted as desired by the third row seat occu trolled from the front seat it can only be turned on and pants off All control of the rear system must be performed by the rear occupants Rear Blower Control The left knob on the Rear Control Panel has four posi tions Off and a range of three blower speeds This allows the third row seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle Rear Control Panel N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 CAUTION Interior air enters the Manual Rear Zone Climate Control system through an intake grille located in the passenger side trim panel behind the third seat The heater outlets are located in the passenger side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control The center knob on the Rear Control Panel allows the third row seat occupants to have control of the rear temperature as follows e When the temperature knob is in the cold Blue position cold air will be delivered from the outlets As the temperature knob is turned towards the hot Red position the air will get warmer Rear Mode Control Floor Air flows through the f
124. Seats If Equipped 0 40 20 40 Second Row Folding Seat 050 50 Third Row Folding Seat If Equipped ll Driver Memory Seat If Equipped H Setting Memory Positions And Linking Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter To NCMO suede d van AR si ER DER 3089 ME O Memory Position Recall O To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To NOMO se ead ed d ves PS WE see e r eds O Easy Entry Exit Seat Mi To Open And Close The Hood N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 MIS P ese se GR OR en ee O Multifunction Lever suceso ec aee een O Headlights And Parking Lights H Automatic Headlight System IE Eaeipped ss sede een ae eee EDE o Headlights On Automatically With Wipers O SmartBeams If Equipped H Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Leadlielits ONIY ese eo oa DEER Ge oo DA Se o Daytime Running Lights If Equipped O Fog Lights If Equipped 2 ecce O Instrument Panel And Interior Lights D Battery Saver Feature Exterior Interior Digits Sus EE opu edo VU RE ge A E Ent 135 135 136 136 136 137 138 138 139 140 Aip MSO Reminder 2 eas arme sie en 140 TUG ICTS ous ware s eee Bo ee Fai ci qaad 140 Fliek Beam Owl 2 acbue ies x1 E Re o ei 141 o Flash To Pass B Headlight OM Delay 2s 24422 KAR RR REED 141 ANEO LIES saak Go READ eas bees 142 O Courtesy Reading Lights 142 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 143 sor MAREE N SE RI p
125. TANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 For uconnect Voice Recognition System VR refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this section Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engine
126. TROL MEMORY 1 POSITIONS SET MEMORY 2 POSITIONS SET MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED SEATBELT BUCK LED with graphic MEMORY SYSTEM DISABLED VEHICLE NOT IN PARK DRIVER 1 MEMORY DRIVER 2 MEMORY ADJ PEDALS DISABLED CRUISE CONTROL SET ADJ PEDALS DISABLED SHIFTER IN REVERSE LOW TIRE PRESSURE CHECK TPM SYSTEM LEFT FRONT LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only RIGHT FRONT LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only LEFT REAR LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM System Only RIGHT REAR LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM Sys tem Only SPARE LOW PRESSURE Premium TPM System Only UNLOCK TO OPERATE Power Liftgate Models Only 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See PUT IN PARK TO OPERATE Power Liftgate Models Only FUNCTION DISABLED Power Liftgate Models Only CLOSE LIFTGLASS Power Liftgate Models Only OBSTACLE DETECTED Power Liftgate Models Only MANUAL CLOSE TO OPERATE Power Liftgate Models Only VEHICLE NOT IN PARK IGNITION POSITION PRESS BRAKE TO START INSERT KEY TURN TO ON N NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the en
127. Voice Recognition System VR Operation This Voice Recognition system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNINCG Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions and all attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 When you press the VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the VR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active appli
128. When High level heating is selected the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated The heat output then drops to the normal High level If High level heating is selected the system will automatically switch to the Low level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change Opera tion on the Low level setting also turns Off automatically after approximately 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat To avoid heated seat surfaces coming in contact and poten tial seat overheating always ensure that the seat heater is in the off position before placing any of the seats into a folded flat position if equipped Rear Heated Seats If Equipped On vehicle
129. Windshield Wiper Blades 400 Windshield Wipers 4 25209 3 9 RAD Fede SE DER 143 Wipers Mtermitient sae sae deb rb Er Eee e 2 144 Wipers Rain Sensitive sued ke tnn 145 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and t
130. Wiper Washer Switch NOTE Always remove any buildup of snow that pre vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper switch is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the lever is released and then resume the intermit tent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Use this feature when weather conditions make occa sional usage of the wipers necessary Pull down and release the control lever for a single wiping cycle Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System Use one of the five intermittent wiper speeds when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Turn the end of the lever to one of the five delay positions for the desired delay interval The delay can be regu
131. addition the EVIC will display one or more Low Pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic display of the pressure value s with the low tire s flashing Refer to Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR TIRE 35 dy 34 PSI 24 8 34 8197133c Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four active road tire s you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the low tire s that is flashing on the graphic display to the vehicle s recommended cold tire pressure The system will automatically update the graphic dis play of the pressure value s will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish STARTING AND OPERATING 335 336 STARTING AND OPERATING once the updated tire pressure s have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information CHECK TPM SYSTEM Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime The EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds This message is then followed by a graphic display with in place of the pressure value s indicating which Tire Pressure Moni tori
132. after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity and occupant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee e The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbags are de signed to activate only in certain side or rollover collisions When the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC detects a collision requiring the window bags to inflate it signals the in
133. age of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 5 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears again OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The overhead console contains an optional universal garage door opener HomeLink storage for sunglasses and optional power sunroof switches Overhead Console GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See WARNING The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans ceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 3
134. al for system function and operating information To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure In The EVIC odometer and uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ENGLISH or MET RIC appears System Status Press and release the MENU button until one of the following System Status messages displays in the EVIC e 5ystem OK e System Warnings Displayed Will display all currently active System Warnings 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See e Tire Pressure Monitor System Shows the current pressure of all four road tires For additional informa tion refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Sec tion 5 of this manual N TIRE 3i war 34 PSI 37 32 X P Tire Pressure Display NOTE e Tires heat up during normal driving conditions Heat will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi 14 to 41 kPa during normal driving conditions Refer to Tire Inflation Pressures in Section 5 for additional information e Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR SALES CODE REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042005200 REO Radio Operating Inst
135. all forward gears when the activation criteria have been met The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Towing with HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer 314 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the
136. as WEE se EEDEN GE cheng 12 379 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 358 Torque Converter Clutch oru ek e 292 Tow Hooks Emergency addere ie be ets 382 Tow Haul Indicator Light i222 191 jo Am 352 383 24 Hour Towing Assistance 98 Disabled irr 1445254664004 KO DE EE 383 fon pissed eaa r E aG 357 Recreational eraras eh oo ew neni HER a 365 hi ESETT ie tees EEEE OOF TOWING ASSISIANCE adore s de gom 9r ace om a 98 TractiOn COMIOL cx 26 254 Gere Perea ee S e 305 Trauer Sway Control ISC s saam ext PEER 312 Wailer VOWS 4 eee deen ae ba eadu oes ees 352 Cooling System Tips isi aea VEERA cae aiis 365 lek ly DC TIT 356 Minimum Requirements sus sk ke HEN 399 Trailer and Tongue Weight s lt 5savssaedeas 1 358 ng oop OR RE OE ER ET 362 Nn INDEX 483 Trailer TOwing Cii sses oan ae tes a pk ee 357 EER REDE ERA RE ERE 357 Transfer Case SS SS a 411 Maintenance een 411 ransmission Automati was B Yee edo suide 345 485 286 412 Maintenance ers 412 PMNS dose Pop dd EES sooo PAPER EE 284 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 157 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless oa TRE 22 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 22 Titi oro Balsa s sciens eee ce RARR ay 140 186 430 433 UCI Connector 3214354 ER eure ce T Rd Ss 247 uconnect Hands Free Phone 84 Underhood Fuses 0004 423
137. ased head motion and possible injury to the To attach a child restraint tether strap oe child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in E a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in Tether Strap Mounting pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown under
138. asoline retailer if the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control system e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 343 e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of th
139. ational Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar 350 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in cr
140. ats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this manual WARNINCG e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Side curtain airbags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Airbag System Components e Front Acceleration Sensors The ai f the following e airbag system consists of the following e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC How the Aiibag System Works DiE ene UE e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines Driver Airbag Passenger Airbag Side Curtain A
141. au eee Guana 144 O Speed Sensitive Intermittent Wiper System 144 O Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 145 N Tilt Telescoping Steering Column 146 W Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 147 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee W Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 148 Mf Rear Camera If Equipped 155 CTO ACIVate nig 9 9 eae suena ree be ees 149 D Turning The Rear Camera On Or Off OTo Set At A Desired Speed sisse 149 With Navigation Radio x odas weder S 156 5 To Deactivate iie dii orco b M M CE e ll Overhead Console If Equipped 157 o To Vary The Speed Setting 150 N Garage Door Opener If Equipped 157 o To Accelerate For Passing 422 151 2 Programming HomeLink 159 W Rear Park Assist If Equipped 151 OO ee O Rear Park Assist Sensors sa eae esses 152 Using Homelinke 0 000 0 eee 162 H Rear Park Assist Warning Display 152 7 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink D Enable Disable The Rear Park Assist 154 DELtOIE ane ARS E eo oe OOR AO ES 162 O Service The Rear Park Assist 154 Bee usce sb qoe s d 8 une anew cosas 162 O Cleaning The Rear Park Assist 165 O Troubleshooting Tips 163 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 O General Information ll Power Sunroof If Equipped D Opening Sunroof Express 3 Closing Sunroof Expre
142. be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas 374 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by in a compartment behind the third row seat Refer to means of a cable winch mechanism To remove or stow Cargo Area Features in Section 3 for further informa the spare use the jack handle to rotate the spare tire tion drive nut The nut is located under a plastic cover at the center rear of the cargo floor area just inside the liftgate opening CAUTION Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism Jack Storage Location NN WHAT TODO IN EMERGENCIES 375 Lowering Raising Spare Tire Spare Tire Removal Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut Use the Lug Wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow to pull the tire out from under the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
143. beam of a standard headlight system e Proper aim and adjustments of the front fog lights should be made to prevent excessive glare for other drivers Instrument Panel and Interior Lights When the multifunction lever is in the parking light headlight or A Auto position if equipped rotating the center portion of the lever up and down will increase and decrease the brightness dimmer control of the instru ment panel lights Full daytime brightness on all elec tronic displays odometer overhead console radio and Automatic Climate Control if equipped is obtained by rotating the center portion of the control to the first detent above the dimmer range Rotating the control to the second detent above the dimmer range turns the interior lights on Rotating the control to the Off extreme bottom position disables all the interior lights even when the doors and liftgate are open While in the Off position the instrument panel lighting is at the lowest light level and may not be suitable for night driving 7031406005 Dimmer Control 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Battery Saver Feature Exterior Interior Lights If the multifunction lever is left in the interior light position parking light position or the headlight position when the ignition switch is moved to the OFF position the battery saver feature will automatically turn off the exterior and interior lights after e
144. before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case
145. bles different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone qo for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button e Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The uconnect phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the uconnect website for supported phones If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of th
146. bly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound a TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will be displayed in the instrument cluster for 60 seconds and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for 75 seconds For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound a CHECK 334 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for 75 sec onds and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped Th
147. bs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 325 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs ra 392 kg 326 STARTING AND OPERATING M Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 130 Ib ie Occupant 3 160 Ibs a EXAMPLE 1 RES 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 lbs Oc
148. by Saying a Name Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 e The uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are
149. cation For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the VR button and say Help or Main Menu 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Commands The Voice Recognition system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni tion system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system
150. change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 442 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M Once a Month CAUTION e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as
151. ck automatically The hazard lights will flash and the fuel will be cut off to the engine In addition after the vehicle has stopped moving the interior lights will illuminate to aid visibility and remain lit until the ignition switch is turned off 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued e You need proper knee impact protection in a EN collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket Maintaining Your Airbag System equipment on or behind the knee bolsters WARNING NOTE The interior lights can only be deactivated if the key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is driven e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate wiring including adding any kind of badges or Airbag Warning Light stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate upper right side of the instrument panel Do not for your protection in an impact The airbag system is modify the front bumper or vehicle body struc designed to be maintenance free If a
152. cking the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or a lower gear range should be selected NOTE Using the TOW HAUL mode if equipped or a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift ing and heat buildup This action will also provide better engine braking The transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance inter vals NOTE Check the transmission fluid level before towing 4 7L and 5 7L engines Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 365 Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed
153. cle has reached the desired speed press down on the Electronic Speed Control lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever towards you or normal brake pres sure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h for 3 7L 4 7L and 5 7L engines To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is ON speed can be increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h 3 7L 4 7L and 5 7L engines speed increase Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h 3 7L 4 7L and 5 7L engines To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is ON push down a
154. coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tuneup to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Cooling System WARNING e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where ri applicable If the engine c
155. crew clockwise Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability NN WHAT TODO IN EMERGENCIES 379 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter clockwise and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct 380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to it s fully closed position WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secur
156. ction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 464 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C WARNING Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
157. ctor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Seat Belt Pretensioners The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision This device improves the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the front airbags the pretensioners are a single use item After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners they must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s
158. cupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 327 WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRE CHAINS Only models fitted with 235 65R17XL extra load tires have sufficient tire to body clearance to allow use of tire chains Install chains on rear tires only Follow these recommendations to guard against damage and exces sive tire and chain wear e For vehicles equipped with 18 inch wheels do not install tire chains or traction devices on tires larger than 235 60R18XL Tires larger than this may not provide sufficient body clearance with chains or other traction devices Manufacturer recommends a cold inflation pressure of 38 psi 262 kPa when using 235 65R17XL size tires for this vehicle Use SAE class S tire chains or traction devices only Follow tire chain manufacturer s instructions for mounting chains Install chains snugly and tighten after 1 2 mi 1 km of driving Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h unless otherwise specified by the chain manufacturer Drive cautiously avoiding large bumps potholes and extreme driving maneuvers 328 STARTING AND OP
159. d 7 Shift the transmission into DRIVE NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flashers 372 B8 If Your Engine Overheats 372 N Jacking And Tire Changing 373 D Jack Location cm Hse eee du a OK 374 OSpare lire StOWage scs scd HAS we pies 374 Opare Tie Removal auteur snanta med 975 O Preparations For Jacking 375 OJacking Instructions ewe BEER N yes Mima 229936 5593 emeari ii W Towing A Disabled Vehicle 0 2 Wheel Drive Models Only 0 4 Wheel Drive Models Only ll Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch bank just above the climate controls A Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the Hazard Warning flasher switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off flashers This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate w
160. d both go out with the engine running e If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on con ra tinuously with the engine running a malfunc tion has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected 318 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Warning Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Tire Markings Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was previously turned off The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 1 US DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 319 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size d
161. d immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The uconnect phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular pho
162. d in the Electronic EES AM LA eee Vehicle Information Center EVIC if the pedals are The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked side of the steering wheel out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 for more information CAUTION Do not place any article under the adjustable pedal s or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the Elec tronic Speed Control system OFF push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The Electronic Speed Control system should be turned OFF when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the Electronic Speed Control or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Con trol system OFF when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehi
163. d the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR cleaners are recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary D
164. der the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in section 4 of this manual or see your authorized dealer Automatic Door Locks If this feature is selected your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h and all doors are closed It will reset whenever a door is opened This feature is selectable and can be turned on or off Refer to Auto Door Locks under Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual or see your authorized dealer Child Protection Door Lock The rear doors of your vehicle are equipped with Child Protection Door Locks If you push up on the lever on the open edge of the door it cannot be opened from the inside of the vehicle Push the lever down to disengage the Child Protection Door Locks WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged Child Protection Door Lock WINDOWS Power Windows The power window controls are located on the driver s door trim panel There is a single switch on the front passenger door rear doors which operate the front NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 passenger rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position 815f
165. dure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing CAUTION It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Turn the ignition key ON engine off 3 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 4 Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL Hold down the NEUTRAL pin switch with a pen etc for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress The lamp will stop blinking stay on solid when the NEUTRAL shift is NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 367 complete A 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will 5 Start the engine display on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 7 Release the brake pedal and ensure that there is no eee vehicle movement 6 Shift the transmission into DRIVE ven v 8 Shut the engine off 9 Shift the transmission into PARK 10 Place the ignition key in the OFF position and remove key 11 Apply the parking brake 12 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with tow bar 13 Release the parking brake Neutral Switch 368 STARTING AND OPERATING NN CAUTION Transmission damage may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEU TRAL and the engine running With the transf
166. e Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Adding Coolant aaa Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than the coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion to 5 Years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replace protection If a non HOAT engine coolant anti ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance freeze is introduced into the cooling system in an period it is important that you use the same engine emergency it should be replaced with the specified coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional antifreeze rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR This vehicle has not been designed for use with Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
167. e of brake application Parking Brake Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and the shift lever is in the PARK position When parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake before placing NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING Continued e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK WARNING e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dan gerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake or the shift lever Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued before driving failure to do so can lead to brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear brakes When parking on a hill turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in mainta
168. e CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton AA withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the _ CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME
169. e Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to regularly check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a graphic displaying tire pressures e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will set the SPARE LOW PRES SURE message but it will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings a The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low In
170. e gear normal 5th gear until the transmis sion fluid and engine coolant are warm NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 293 e If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torgue converter into the transmission This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear position Rocking The Vehicle If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever between DRIVE and REVERSE while applying slight pressure to the accelerator NOTE The Electronic Stability Program ESP and Traction Control if equipped should be turned OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Section 3 of this manual The least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine is most effective Racing the engine or spinning the wheels due to the frustration of not freeing the vehicle may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure d
171. e last number dialed from the uconnect phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF uconnect phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the PHONE button to begin N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every uconnect phone language change operation only the language spec
172. e mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns 460 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
173. e manufacturer NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle 344 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx Id FLEXIBLE FUEL 4 7L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique yellow fuel filler cap gas cap that states Ethanol E 85 Unleaded Gasoline and by the FLEXFUEL badge that will be located on the body of y
174. e oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your local authorized dealer ser vice station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replaceme
175. e shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Section 5 of this manual This manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine MOPAR parts and is inter ested in your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This v
176. e the tire jack and tools in their proper loca tions NOTE Tire should be stowed with the beauty side up Storing the tire upside down may result in scratching or damage to the wheel face Continue winching up the tire until you hear the winch ratchet three times Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the underbody of the vehicle Damage to the winch cable may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose WARNING Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down Impact type tools may damage the winch mechanism 12 Reinstall the rubber plug into the floor of the cargo area JUMP STARTING If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully NN WHAT TODO IN EMERGENCIES 381 WARNING 2 Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but with out letting the vehicles touch Set the parking brake on e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not both vehicles place the transmission in PARK and turn allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth the ignition OFF ing Do not lean over a battery when attaching a ff the h i ll lectri clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contami
177. e track Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Main Menu to switch to the main menu e Next Channel to select the next channel 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the following commands Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e New Memo to record a new memo During the e Delete All to delete all memos recording you may press the VR button to stop record ing You proceed by saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the VR button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands Language German Language Dutch Language Italian Language English Language French Language Spanish Tutorial Voice Training N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 NOTE Keep
178. e uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE xe Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most uconnect phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away
179. ea Max GTW Gross Max Trailer bined Wt Rating Trailer Wt Tongue Wt See Note 87L 4x2 8 700 Ibs 3 946 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg 350 lbs 159 kg 8 800 Ibs 3 991 ke 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg 8 700 lbs 3 946 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 ke 8 800 Ibs 3 991 kg 40 sq ft 3 72 sq m 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg 4 7L w Trailer 4 4 4 4 4 4 Tow Group IV 4 11 800 Ibs 5 351 kg 60 sq ft 5 57 sq m 6 500 lbs 2 948 Kg 650 Ibs 295 kg 4x2 12 700 Ibs 5 760 kg 60 sq ft 5 57 sq m 7 400 lbs 3 356 kg 740 Ibs 336 kg 12 700 Ibs 5 760 kg 60 sq ft 5 57 sq m 7 200 lbs 3 266 kg 720 lbs 327 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds x2 Tow Group IV x2 x4 NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be consideredas and Loading Information placard Refer to the Tire part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and Safety Information section in this manual should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire 358 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to swa
180. ear window washer is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the ve
181. eased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 351 Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from f
182. ect the electrical connector 7 Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil Seres contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the 1 Low Beam Bulb 4 i bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the 2 High Beam Bu 3 Front Park Turn Signal Bulb PME with rubbing alcohol 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Fog Light 1 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left or right 2 Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel to unsnap and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield Access to the bulb can be gained through the wheel liner hole ea teer ray etae ag 3 Reach through the access hole to access the back of the front fog light housing on the back of the front fascia 4 Disconnect the electrical connector 5 Turn the socket on the back of the housing 1 4 turn counterclockwise to unlock it 6 Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the opening in the housing 7 Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Backup Lights 3 Pull the outboard side of the rear lamp unit
183. ection 4 for more information NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Easy Entry Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the vehicle There are two possible Easy Entry Exit adjustments available e The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm if the starting position of the seat is greater than or equal to 2 67 in 68 mm forward of the rear seat stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will then move forward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position e The seat will move to the position located 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the starting position is between 0 9 to 2 67 in 23 to 68 mm forward of the rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward to the memory driving position when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position toward the ACC ON position The Easy Entry Exit feature will be automatically dis abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0 9 in 23 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit Entry Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from t
184. ed as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 8 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM 9 Vehicle Security Light This light will flash rapidly for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is arming The light will flash at a slower speed continuously after the alarm is set The security light will also come on for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned on 10 Oil Pressure Warning Light qu This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 11 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS
185. ed key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate liftgate flipper glass and ignition for unautho rized operation When the alarm is activated the Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals The horn headlights and tail lights will sound flash repeatedly for three minutes If disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors igni tion after three minutes the headlights and tail lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ ent Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the Security modes to hear the differences in the horn
186. ed momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the detented ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Integrated Ignition Key The integrated ignition key operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter and a valet key which stores in the rear of the RKE transmitter The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead The valet key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the valet key with you when valet parking To remove the valet key from the RKE transmitter slide the mechanical latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 81bb182d Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter NOTE You can insert the double sided valet key into the lock cylinders with either side up Ignition Key Removal Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the key 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK it may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunctio
187. eed within the same cycle the system will automatically DO NOT use the recirculation mode stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed manu ally Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather e If your liftgate is power closing and you put the vehicle in gear the liftgate will continue to power close However vehicle movement may result in a detection of an obstruction NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers front airbags for both the driver and right front passenger and window bags for the driver and passengers seated next to a window If you will be carrying children too small for adult size belts your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems NOTE The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING e In a collision you and your passengers can suffer injuries including
188. een 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions Radio Mode TALI oo ees EAN ADS HS ESSO NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio side of the radio faceplate Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio raad Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right
189. ehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System If Equipped The controls for the heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions 81350206 Manual Air Conditioning And Heating Controls 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See The instrument panel features four dual vane airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be closed to partially block airflow and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where the occupant desires Blower Control The blower control rotary knob on the left controls the blower and can be set in one of four speeds and OFF The blower fan motor will remain on un til the system is turned to the OFF position or the ignition is turned OFF B12d1942 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the b
190. ehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not INTRODUCTION 5 Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully Ay WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK 80bfedf0 Rollover Warning Label 6 INTRODUCTION M Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In fact the U S government notes that the universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10 000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on
191. ehicle over 5 mph disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE trans mitters until the ignition is turned back to OFF LOCK 81bb182d Three Button RKE Transmitter To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Flash Lamps with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehic
192. em carefully NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 283 If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the heater cord to a ground fault interrupter protected 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to 5 have an adequate warming effect on the coolant The engine block heater cord is located e 3 7L 4 7L Engine coiled and strapped to the engine oil dipstick tube e 5 7L Engine bundled and fastened to the injector harness
193. eminder only sounds when the integrated ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses the factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni tion Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera tion Therefore only RKE transmitters that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid RKE transmitter to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible 18 THINGS TO
194. en TSC is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway HSA Hill Start Assist 4WD Models With NV245 Two Speed Transfer Case Only The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 313 period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 8 grade or greater hill e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction ie vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear HSA will work in REVERSE and
195. en driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or 310 STARTING AND OPERATING xe gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion Full Off 4WD Models Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by depressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running After five seconds the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual for more information In this mode ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the system returns to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability fea
196. er lees 175 Rear Window Features eee 174 Rear Wiper ele ei wa e aug godes 174 Rearview Mirrors 0 00 ce eee eee 80 Reclining Front Seats s eese eet AR A EE 118 Recorder Event Data 0 0005 59 Recreational Towing vise a d ope RE SCR 365 Ne INDEX 479 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 366 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 368 Reformulated Gasoline 000 340 REM ei A P 399 Reminder LEMES OR 214444645 0555 bees 140 Reminder Seat Belt 0000 47 Remote Control Sie S SIE Save vane AE a bag seca eeu Zi Remote Keyless Entry RKE 0 22 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 259 Remote StarUng System exces dors aus ps 27 Replacement DUDS s acq aee a ues A nireti 0 Pag d 428 Replacement Keys coss ea dea tipa b qe es 18 Replacement PAS oes ope tu qupd ve Pee 393 Reporting Salety Defects 24 6605 VEE SR 460 Restraints Child secresrerda P bes oe HEET 61 Restraints Qupani sae cy bedoa xo EER 82 goes N 39 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck ese Es 293 Roll Over Warning Koot Type Camicr serae RA ORE pot dra as 176 Rotation Tires 24444444 Ye x OY od Eu S ORS 328 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 73 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 74 Safety Defects Reporting seeds RS 664 4 460 Safety Exhaust Gas amaeidir GES REED RR Boe 38 72 Safety Information Tire ws
197. er LLC n m O O Z j isi e eSI Ee oe DIT e TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 4 942 989 3433 8983 9 390 39 RS RACE REESE MESS RON ORE RR KOS TR e THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE soes es sesse esse sesse esse UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE sees sesse esse ss t tn UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL osse sees sesse sesse sesse see esse STARTING AND OPERATING dark 406 we ECC ECC OR Se ed OR EON CERO 30909 wee P die ae CONTENTS Mi Introduction W Rollover Warning ll How To Use This Manual INTRODUCTION W Warnings And Cautions B Vehicle Identification Number W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION Se INTRODUCTION This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both on road and off road use It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two wheel drive enclosed vehicles were not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer cas
198. er case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK refer to steps 7 and 8 above Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Depress the brake pedal 2 Turn the ignition key ON engine off 3 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 4 Shift the transfer case out of NEUTRAL Hold down the NEUTRAL pin switch with a pen etc for four seconds until the LED lamp by the switch starts to blink indicating shift in progress The lamp will stop blinking go out when shift is complete The 4WD SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL message will no longer be displayed on the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 369 WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Neutral Switch f 5 Shift the transmission into PARK CAUTION 6 Start the engine Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damage
199. er lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner to remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to wipe frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Adding Washer Fluid On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC the low washer fluid level will be indicated When the sensor detects a low fluid level the windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the WASHER FLUID LOW message will be displayed The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the r
200. ere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 1 SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 of this manual 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard 324 STARTING AND OPERATING xe NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 l
201. ering or disassembly is prohibited DIs DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc AM FM CD DVD RADIO RER REN IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN and RER radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your uconnect tunes REN or RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure uconnect gps RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Tum on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock
202. eriods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual DRIVE Shift into DRIVE only when the vehicle is at a complete stop and the brakes are firmly applied The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shift lever left or right when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position allowing you to limit the highest available gear For example if the driver 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se shifts the transmission into ERS 3 third gear the trans mission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to 2 second or 1 first when needed NOTE e If you pull and hold not tap the shift lever to the left the transmission will downshift to the lowest gear that can be attained without overrevving the engine The display will show the gear the vehicle is in and will limit the top gear to the one displayed If you pull and hold not tap the shift lever to the right the tra
203. es 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Four Way Passenger s Power Seat If Equipped The front passenger s power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the passenger seat lower side trim The bottom switch controls forward rearward adjust ment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjust ment NOTE The four way seat does not have an up down adjustment Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjustable head restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical The head restraints have a locking button which must be pushed in to lower the head restraint to all positions The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button B13b25d1 Adjustable Head Restraints Front Heated Seats If Equipped The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel below the heater air conditioning controls After turning the ignition ON N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 you can choose from a High or Low heat setting Illumi nated LED indicators on each switch indicate the level of heat in use Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off Two indica tors will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off
204. esigna tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 320 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction
205. ess and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary Tune Scroll control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the Tune Scroll control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type B
206. estigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the U S government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product
207. et dues qe d 70 Phone Cellular SE SE SE 84 Phone Hands Free uconnect Ln 84 Placard Tire and Loading Information 323 Polishing and Waxing Oe Me Id Power Distribution Center Fuses 423 Door LOCKS 2222426034 EERS RE ie ERA EER EE 29 litis rr 169 bie OROS N OE EER ORE 36 INDIES 552943929829 2252 172 E340 SPESE 82 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 167 o Arc HERE HTS AE HE RES 119 120 ACODE eed hess beasts RE ER ees 298 299 AOO 4 442 ER cee este dra RE bee eee 164 WVIDGOWS 2 645669 54 4ae4 eek BL AR SR 31 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 48 Preparation for Jacking umero Rek e oa oie Pretensioners Peat DCMS ase dade DRR ARE AAS ad A7 Programmable Electronic Features 203 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless ER IEV sis ceas da mom aes 22 Radio Opera Hon ressas apasa RR EE sae obs as 261 Radio Satellite uconnect gps 252 257 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 145 Red AC OOIE Gocco or BP Ges ten eas 2 1 Rear Axle Differential sss 410 Rear Camera 2 4444 2445 5n554 6n84 6546450845 155 Rear Cupholder 45 0220 ze FAR ss HERE SE RE 171 Rear Heated Seats 5 a s 634 zoe Eier db eae S 122 Rear LHHedlef z aue ccm kode Ped oe ORE SUE S 271 Rear Park Sense Systemi N ies ote a Xe X dep 151 Rear Seat Fold and Tumble 124 Rear Seat Folding ses deep ER EGRE RS 124 128 Rear Window Defrost
208. etected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the
209. eturn to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off 104 UNDERSTANDING THE F
210. f equipped 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options e VES Power Allows you to tum VES ON and will display the following OFF if equipped e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if subtitles to different subtitle languages that are equipped available on the disc if equipped e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by switch to different audio languages if supported on pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped MEMO Gs capes e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the equipped TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes NOTE Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save E hanges e The available selections for each of the above entries cang varies depending upon the disc e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set e These selections can only be made while playing a defaults according to customer preference DVD N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Menu Language If Eguipped Selecting this item wi
211. filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 445 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _I Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter rep
212. finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See uconnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the uconnect phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay
213. flators on the crash side of the vehicle and both sides of the vehicle when rollover is sensed A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the window bag The inflating window bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the window bag inflates This especially applies to children The win dow bag is only about 3 in 8 cm thick when it is inflated e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag If a Deployment Occurs The airbag system is designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC detects a moderate to severe frontal collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then to immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are s
214. g excessive wear or unpredictable braking action After driving off road completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check the tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and suspension Retighten if required to torque values specified in the Service Manual Also check for accumulations of vegeta tion or brush that could become a fire hazard or conceal damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts CAUTION Under frequent heavy duty driving conditions change all lubricants and lubricate body compo nents all driveline joints and steering linkage more often than in normal service to prevent excessive wear Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care reguirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The
215. g the LIFTGATE button on the Re mote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Press the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitetr twice within five seconds to open the power liftgate Once the liftgate is open pressing the button twice within five seconds a second time will close the liftgate Also the power liftgate may be closed by pressing the Liftgate switch located on the left rear trim near the liftgate opening Pressing once will close the liftgate only This button cannot be used to open the liftgate Rear Liftgate Switch When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is pressed two times the turn signals will flash twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or closing NOTE In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emergency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the lift gate trim panel WARNING THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the liftgate Light pressure anywhere along these strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open position The power liftgate must be in the full open position for rear liftgate close button or overhead console close button to operate If the liftgate is not fully open press the Liftgate button on the Fob with Integrated Key FOBIK to fully open the liftgate and then press it again to close
216. ge before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restarting Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first PARK This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever into the PARK position WARNINCG e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Continued NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 287 WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Shift into NEUTRAL when the vehicle is standing for prolonged p
217. gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level Refer also to the Note under torque converter clutch later in this section During cold temperature operation you may notice de layed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature This feature improves the warmup time of the engine and transmission If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the TRANSMISSION OVER TEMP message may display and the transmis sion may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmis sion cools down After cool down the transmission will resume normal operation In high ambient temperatures with sustained high engine speed and load an upshift followed shortly thereafter by a downshift may occur The TOW HAUL light will turn off This is a normal part of the overheat protection strategy when operating in the TOW HAUL mode The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to the most desirable gear if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode If Equipped When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch Thi
218. ger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal in juries and death Power Door Locks The power door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors 021707162 Power Door Lock Switch If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee If you press the door lock switch while the keys are in the ignition switch and the driver s door is open the doors will not lock The rear doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle until you pull up the lock plungers Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature If Equipped If Auto Unlock is enabled this feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL Refer to Auto Unlock on Exit un
219. ges Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or automatic locking retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and p
220. gh the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Maintenance After Off Road Driving After extended operation in mud sand or water or similar dirty conditions have your brake discs brake linings and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as possible This will prevent any abrasive material from causin
221. gine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B Elapsed Time Service Distance Display Units of Measure In 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel ave
222. gle beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Dial N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Ioggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button unt
223. h allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this section UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER REN REP REW or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini
224. h knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s second row seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able Howeve
225. he following licenses United States sie ek be ws KR5S120123 Canada a uox AA dev EE RARE 2671 S120123 STARTING AND OPERATING 339 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 7 and 4 7L Engine All engines except 5 7L engines are de signed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un 800dfab leaded regular gasoline having an oc tane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 5 7L Engine RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD The 5 7L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 340 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto
226. he vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler LLC AA 81 326 0915 Second Edition Printed in U S A
227. he Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 441 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil
228. he factory The Easy Entry Exit feature is enabled or later disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 for more information 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the release lever inside your vehicle located below 816024a0 Underhood Safety Latch CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to 031306032 PAN Cua Za Rua arem close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage Hood Release Handle 2 Reach under the hood move safety latch to the left and lift the hood NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights turn signals headlight beam selection instru ment panel light dimming passing light interior courtesy dome lights and optional fog lights The mul tifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Headlights and Parking Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the fir
229. he first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 444 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil
230. hicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this manual The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel Wi only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the converter as an emission control device 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves
231. hone in Section 3 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the directi
232. icate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 13 Temperature Gauge
233. ific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the PHONE button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone Towing
234. ight minutes Normal operation will resume when the ignition is turned ON or when the headlight switch is turned to another position Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights You can signal a lane change by moving the lever partially up or down Turn Signal Control Turn Signal Auto Mode Tap the multifunction lever once and the turn signal left or right will flash three times and automatically turn off N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 High Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever towards you High Beam Low Beam Select Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released Headlight Off Delay There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle lights for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF To activate the headlight delay the multi function lever must be rotated to the Off position after the ignition switch is turned OFF
235. il you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VOICE RECOG NITION button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there 1s a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be th
236. iler Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 353 Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Trailer Tongue Weight TW The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch s
237. iler towing necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 450 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires _J Replace the ignition cables 4 7L Engine L1 Replace the side row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine _J Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature A
238. ill downshift the transmission and display 5 ERS 5 is the same as normal 4th gear Another tap to the left will shift the transmission down to ERS 4 direct gear WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Display 1 2 3 5 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 5 Applies to vehicles equipped with 4 7L 5 7L engines only Actual Gear s Allowed NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive 5th gear for 3 7L engine 4th and oth gears for 4 7L and 5 7L engines The transmission will automatically shift to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the transmission selector is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem perature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e transmission has reached normal temperature operating 290 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable
239. imilar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 e t is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and seat belt retractor assem bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning Enhanced Accident Response Feature If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical system remains functional vehicles equipped with power door locks will unlo
240. in mind that you have to press the VR button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the VR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recogni tion 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Front Manual Seat Adjustment Move the seat forward or rearward using the adjustment bar Lift up on the bar located on the front of the seat near the floor Position the seat and be sure the latch engages 5 fully WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To adjust the seatback lift the lever located on the ENING ELE e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area i
241. increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be 042305232 set at the same volume level as last played RES Radio 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Sett
242. ing 2WD Models o Towing Quadra Trac I Single Speed Transfer Case 4WD Models 0 Towing Quadra Trac II Quadra Drive II WD Models NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 281 STARTING PROCEDURE Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued e Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the shift lever Accidents can also be caused by pressing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the ex haust system resulting in overheating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries Normal Starting Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Do no
243. ing a separator and a three character extension n m e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre gem lun Rate bps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 Bit Rate kb
244. ing power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precautions that must be considered before entering the water NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 295 CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driv ing through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to entering Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave effects Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in 23 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in 51 cm
245. ing the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button i
246. ining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent 302 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The ABS conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal The ABS pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal WARNING e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Continued NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 303
247. io display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current select
248. ion or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and
249. ior Fuses The fuse panel is on the lower instrument panel just to the left of the steering column Fuse Panel ity Fuse 1 30 Amp Audio Amp B Green 2 15 Amp Sunroof B Blue MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 Cav Cartridge viini Fuse Description Cav Cartridge vrini Fuse Description ity Fuse ity Fuse 3 10 Amp Htd Mirror EBL Red 20 Amp Rr Pwr Out B Yellow 10 Amp Rr HVAC R O Red Commander oH 6 JSpr B 10 10 Amp _ Final Drive Control Red Module FDCM Heater Ventilation Air Conditioning HVAC Rear Heated Seat Switch O H Heater Ventilation Air Conditioning Yellow Park Assist AE u JjSee B 20Amp Pwr Outlet B Door Mods O H Yellow Lamps IP Courtesy Lamps Glove Box 13 10 Amp Autowipe R A Red 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cav Cartridge viini Fuse Description Cav Cartridge vrini Fuse Description ity Fuse ity Fuse 14 20 Amp _ Cigar Ltr R A 2 Yellow 10 Amp fTire Pressure Iran Red sponders R O gt e Rear Wiper B 16 10 Amp Upper amp Lower Blue Red Switch Bank Diag 24 10 Amp Power Distribution Connector Cluster Red Center PDC Relays B Powertrain Control 17 15 Amp _ Flipper Glass B Module A580 R S Blue 25 10 Amp _ Shifter Assy BTSI 19 Spare Red Trans Case Switch R S ESP ABS Trailer 20 10 Amp Steering Column Con sway Damp Relay Red trol
250. irbags above Side Windows Side Remote Acceleration Sensors Driver Side Seat Track Position Sensor Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Interconnecting Wiring Knee Impact Bolsters if a frontal side or rollover collision is severe enough to require the front and or side airbags to inflate The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC will detect roll overs not rear impacts The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the knee bolster the instru ment panel and the steering wheel and column If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate e The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning er Light for six to eight seconds for a self check N when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on
251. is mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030407085 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal Automatic Dimming Mirrors If Equipped If y
252. ith the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may run down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the fan control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system NN WHAT TODO IN EMERGENCIES 373 CAUTION JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Driving with a hot cooling system could damage WARNING your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could
253. ition Recirculation This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The button includes an LED that illuminates which indicates that the Recir culation mode is active You may use this feature separately N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculate icon button to return to outside air Some temperature humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation mode to be selected while in the defrost or defrost floor modes Attempting to use the Recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the button to blink and then turn off Rear Climate Control If Equipped The Manual Rear Climate Control system has one floor air outlet passenger side and two panel outlets in the rear quarter trim on each side The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and upper outlets If rear heating cooling is desired press the Rear On Off Switch located in the upper switch bank above the controls and select Floor Bi Level or Panel from the Rear Control Panel right knob located on the right rear quarter trim panel Rear On Off Switch 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR IN
254. itter linked to memory position 1 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To recall the memory setting for driver two press memory button number 2 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory buttons on the drivers door during a recall S 1 or 2 When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat driver s mirror and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key 2 Press and release memory button number 1 The system will recall any memory settings stored in position 1 Wait for the system to complete the memory recall before continuing to Step 3 3 Press and release the memory S SET button located on the driver s door 4 Within five seconds press and release memory button 1 on the driver s door 5 Within five seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memory position repeat steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter NOTE Once programmed all RKE transmitters linked to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time Refer to Remote Linked to Memory under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in S
255. k battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of 328 ft 100 m How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e Doors closed e Hood closed e Liftgate closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level and e RKE PANIC button not pressed To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE e If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sun
256. ke and accelerator pedals to the desired positions NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 5 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set 6 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key 7 Press and release the S SET button located on the driver s door 8 Within five seconds press and release memory button 1 or 2 on the driver s door The next step must be performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position 11 Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and enter Yes Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 for more information 12 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or to link another RKE transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC To recall the memory settings for driver one press memory button number 1 on the driver s door or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transm
257. l leen 315 Pl OE Seel gh ak OR emn o9 REUS Rea Eu a 912 Hitches Trailer OWNS 2 bzegawdc eed qu HOE REDE 356 Holger CU Javaeanneoretteauetere bes A 171 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 157 Hood Release SEE EE SS ee 134 aile AE oan a Gee OE OE EIE OE 15 SEE EE ER EE es 14 15 Ignition Key Removal ss sa Re Es EER n 15 ING iro Marii ro EN so pee oe es 21 Immobilizer Sentry Key lesen 17 Infant Restraint eee 61 62 Information Center Vehicle aaaea 194 Inside Rearview Mirror llle 80 Instrument Cluster 0000 184 185 Instrument Panel and Controls 183 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 419 Integrated Power Module Fuses 426 Interior Appearance are es escis a a xd Nig a 418 Interior FUSES ask CE NON Y SOR OR KO oe BS 420 Interior Hie HUIS oa oos xus de Be eens SE HEDE 142 Intetior Lights 224944 quanh e dore e RAAR RE 139 142 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 144 Introduction aco ac acre dh ond aaa Hen oH eo RE HS 4 Inverter Power 2 4 aao oa VERE boa OOS eae Ss 169 Jack Location 42444256 a nir ase ee en t ee Gs 374 Jack Operation 2029 this esas 9 9 E oed 373 376 10 Oe Id Jacking TNSHUCHONG sede sae aye ack dna BAD a 376 JOM OI ve der ESE eke ute eee asa SX 380 Key Ora E 264 REELS ee SE eens eau ss 19 Key neplacement as qoibos DEE WEE n nen ERAS 18 Key ens CnmoD
258. label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into raad the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right
259. lace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 446 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter Rotate tires Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine change if using your vehicle for police Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines towing Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km
260. lated from a maxi mum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every 1 2 second NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Rain Sensing Wipers If Eduipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi tive Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity Settings 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the system NOTE e The rain sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the Low or High speed position e The rain sensing feature may not function properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind shield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance e A customer programmable feature in the Electronic Vehicle Informati
261. law INDEX oT Id ABS Anti Lock Brake System uae Ha asia 301 modo Dueb 2 24 223 2 8 eee ETER oe 347 Adjustable Pedals pet sms RED ded ws 147 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 396 Air Conditioner Maintenance 398 Dar COWOIMOUINE 4446344 EO EERS SPOEL ERR 264 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 274 Air Conditioning Rear Zone aca wets BESEERDE 271 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 399 Par COACINONING SYSTEM issie bas DR a eet an 264 air Pier 24446464062 eeheeseandee ee ees se 396 io cisci ee 6 oe a RESI PREIS eas 49 Airbag Deployment iss en 544 oh bone 4 AR 56 Pipe LIS uoces EEUU EV ER es 58 73 187 Airbag Maintenance 24 2650 rider Sadler d eons ded 58 Alare Pan SPERO QT T TEC oe OR ee ER Ee 25 Alarm Security Alarm 20 188 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antenna Satellite Radio 04 253 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 436 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 301 304 Anti Lock Warning Light Anti Theft System Appearance Care uso peii 9 9 11v RD ed te PEER 415 Arming Theft System Security Alarm Assist Hill Start DSISEIDCE JOWE aaa Gea ue eee Pares HO d 98 Auto Down Power Windows 32 Automatic Dimming Mirror aa xad ee cbs Rr 80 Automatic Door Locks less 30 Atome Hel HE oues iens ws ERK ee RES 136 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 264 Automatic Transmissio
262. laying the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function N UNDERS
263. le Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Headlamp Off Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Sound Horn with Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual To Release the Liftgate Flipper Glass Press the FLIPPER GLASS TRUNK RELEASE button two times the second press within 5 seconds of the first press to open liftgate flipper glass WARNING Driving
264. le speeds in 4WD LOW range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated in 4WD LOW range when ESP is off NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off mode is intended for off road use only TSC Trailer Sway Control TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Section 5 of this manual Wh
265. le weight rating GAWR requirements NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 355 057007125 057007124 Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct 356 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx Id 057007123 Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch In correct Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Industry Standards Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy Dut 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Model GCWR Gross Com Frontal Ar
266. level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE level range Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE range CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engin
267. ll allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
268. loor outlet located on the right side of the rear floor into the rear seating area Bi Level Air flows through both the outlets located in the rear quarter trim panels and the one located on the floor The rear quarter trim panel outlets can be closed to block airflow Panel P Air flows through the outlets located in the rear quarter trim panels These registers can be closed to block airflow 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality a
269. lower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control The temperature control rotary knob in the center controls the air tem perature The coldest temperature set ting is on the extreme left and the warmest setting on the extreme right of the rotation The knob can be posi tioned at any point on the dial B12d193c The mode control rotary knob on the right can be placed in several posi Hons Dots between each of the mode selections identify intermediate modes that allow the occupants to fine tune EE airflow distribution N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Defrost Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained Defrost Floor ve Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets ef and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats Some airflow is delivered to defrost while in the floor mode so that comfort can be maintained Bi Level
270. ls Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door 021305151 Battery Replacement 1 Battery Access Door 2 Remove and replace the batteries Avoid touching the new batteries with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A wea
271. manufacturer s worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 341 CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system com ponents Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made fr
272. most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove e Use MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tailgate must be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considere
273. multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The awdliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305233 RES RSC Radio 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON o
274. n 286 412 Adding TING uar Ghat Gate kepara HR Bae 414 Puid and Filter Changes v saw e one DER ER 412 Fluid Level Check sssasese4xe gre 94x33 413 FU De TT 412 Special Ad VES 26 452 jeu 5408 PROP Hest gii 412 N INDEX 467 lorgue Convener seca eas SR MR hoe BE ORA 292 nues A CC rrr 287 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 167 Auxiliary Power Outlet 353 294 5 xm ESE 167 ES AT OE ET RAS bebe bees oe EDE 397 BIMereency OIAUE 242 exes PP RR earned d 380 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Saving Feature Protection 140 Belts Seat 2 22524 anaetpeeteen Goa AO AE 40 73 Body Mechanism Lubrication 399 Pillar LOCO ON sioe exo NAR AAS oe eee d 323 Brake Assist Systemi 6 5 5 4 ore eden HO RE d 305 Brake Control System Electronic ees deer EuE 304 Drake BEI 2s dee tant eee eh se AARON d 409 Dilake oy seh sos node 2 ae ee 9 oo aw ogo d 409 Anti Lock ABS 4654 DEE eee dod ERE d 301 304 ieke SEE gee ag ER OE a IE OE 409 Moster HIDE usus 43 699 HEERS ARE RD 409 DEK aee a ses paw oa we ee P 300 Warming Die lit NEP PM 185 Brake Transmission Interlock 285 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 71 Bulb Replacement 5 399 249 1 597945 x9 prii 428 BUDS LIENE 2225995292953 S ER bo pee aes PS 74 cCaliprauon COUDISS 4 052 X pat qw oo a oa dens d 202 Camera Rear eee 155 Capacities EIU 2 46 25 des Ee Ra Sr E 436 Caps Filler PUG pase
275. n and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the 306 STARTING AND OPERATING M benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING BAS Brake Assist System cannot prevent the natu ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce e
276. n occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi tion Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details refer to Key Off Power Delay under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Key In Ignition Reminder If you open the driver s door with the integrated ignition key in the ignition a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition r
277. n on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen raad All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Pr
278. n until you hear one click This is an indication that cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tighten properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 349 CAUTION Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Electronic Vehicle Information Center Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more information WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling tem could result from using an improper fuel tank filler cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system WARNING e Never add fuel when the engine is running e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the tank filled VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by N
279. napproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for additional warranty information Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 WARNING Continued e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit aft
280. nd Row Seat the release strap located at the rear of the seat and tumble the seat forward 1 Pull the release strap Release Strap Release Strap N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 2 Lower the center seatback Center Seat Armrest Second Row Seat If z eas Equipped The second row center seat may be equipped with a armrest Pull strap to lower armrest RE REM Folding Center Seatback Armrest Second Row Seat 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 50 50 Third Row Folding Seat If Equipped To Lower Rear Seat Either side of the third row seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room 1 Open the tailgate 2 Pull the seatback release handle toward rear of ve hicle and lower the seatback using the pull strap 64baf8 Seatback Release Handle 3 Close the tailgate N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 To Raise Rear Seat WARNING 1 the taileate Open the tailgate The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear 2 Detach pull strap from back of seat and pull seatback seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position upward until it locks into place Reattach strap should not be used as a play area by children when F the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system DRIVER MEMORY SEAT
281. nd hold SET DECEL Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases NOTE The Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Electronic Speed Control switch functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure proper operation If this occurs the system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control switch ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle SET speed NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The automatic transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE e The Electronic Speed Control System maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal e On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist provides visible and audible indi cations of the distance between the rear fascia and the detected obstacle when backing up Refer to the Warning Section and Note Section for limitations of this system and recommendations
282. nd release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for two seconds Current display will reset along with other functions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction A the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature Automatic Compass Calibration When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated To complete the calibration process drive slowly 5 mph 8 km h in one or more complete circles in an area free from magnetic material until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn on the ignition switch 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass is displa
283. nds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the learn button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi ca
284. ne the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the uconnect phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the uconnect phone e Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the VOICE REC OGNITION button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different elec
285. ne oil and engine oil L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary I Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 449 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or Schedule 96 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate tires J Change the engine oil and engine oil Replace the engine air cleaner filter filter Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine L Rotate tires Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines 1 If using your vehicle for any of the Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary f following Dusty or off road conditions Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the transfer case fluid replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet Inspect the brake linings replace if O C C C O L LL L off road or frequent tra
286. ng Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play O Notes On Playing MP3 Files O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play B Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Bl Universal Consumer Interface UCI Ir Batipped EE RR ER 34 eat EP dns O Connecting The iPod D Using This Feature D Controlling The iPod Using Radio buttons o Play Mode O List Or Browse Mode Bl uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES Radios mr TEE O System Activation o Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID O Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode 44 4280 cous e546 5 84929539 94495 253 O Satellite Antenna lees 253 AReception Quality sis cede RC EIE ETE s 254 D Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode O Operating Instructions uconnect phone di Eatipped 2 vica eds get aee 3 Ea EIS ed 257 Bl uconnect studios Sirius Backseat TV i dese 5 54 on ed ice o ee eee px CP dw Foes pay ll Video Entertainment System Sales Code XRV IPBguipieda a scs ena acini aa eso d 257 ll Remote Sound System Controls HEUP EE 259 ORadio Ope fation iss ap 444 RES YES 259 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN BCD Elle E 260 M CD DVD Maintenance 260 ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 261 Mi Climate Controls
287. ng Sensor s is not being received NOTE Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI kPa or BAR 34 34 81971362 TIRE 35 PSI If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will not be present and a pressure value will be displayed instead of dashes A system fault can occur by any of the following NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 337 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Freguencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds when a system fault is de tected possibly related to the trigger component In this case the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message is then fol lowed by a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates the pressure values are still being received from the TPM Sensors However the system still needs to be serviced as long as the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message exists NOTE e f your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire as
288. ng and after hard braking accelerations or turns This occurs due to the shifting of the fuel in the tank Also a single chime will sound ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster SERVICE TIRE PRESS SYSTEM The EVIC consists of the following e System Status Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Compass Display Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Functions The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button Press and release the MENU button and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Personal Settings and System Sta tus FUNCTION SELECT Button Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select the displayed function YES Y or NO N SCROLL Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip VW Functions Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features and System Status Mes sages UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 COMPASS TEMPERATURE Button Press and release the COMPASS A TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVI
289. ng retractors Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt the cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary For the second and third row seat belts with the automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is fully extracted from the retrac tor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint For additional information refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In your vehicle s 2nd row outboard seating positions you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still cannot be tightened
290. nged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be per formed If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic con verter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the EVIC Refer to Section 4 of this manual Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened The message will remain displayed until the vehicle diagnostic system can retest the fuel system The test will perform the next time the vehicle is started if the vehicle was keyed off above 40 F 4 C outside temperature and the following vehicle start is above 40 F 4 C outside temperature It may be possible to have a message that will not clear due to the test being disabled due to low outside temperatures If the test is performed and the problem is gone the message will disappear If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap
291. ngine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 307 NOTE Anytime the ESP system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program for a complete explanation of the available ESP modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Electronic Stability Program This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition En gine power may also be reduced
292. njury brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 362 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations Oo OD O70 OTO Mad 4 Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground STARTING AND OPERATING 363 057003765 7 Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes 364 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and ba
293. nloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the uconnect Phonebook l e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the VOICE RECOGNITION button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a sin
294. nnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM s
295. normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for main
296. nside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed outboard side of the seat lean back and release the lever at the desired position To return the seatback lift the lever lean forward and release the lever WARNING e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest In Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the re cliner only when the vehicle is parked Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Manual Lumbar Support Adjustment The manual lumbar support adjustment lever is located on the right side of the driver s seat and on the left side of the passenger s seat if eguipped Moving the lumbar control lever fore and aft increases or decreases the lumbar support antares s oat anie tle eL M eee Manual Lumbar Control Eight Way Driver s Power Seat The driver s power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the driver s seat lower side trim The bottom switch controls up down forward rearward and tilt adjustment The top switch controls the seatback recline adjustment Ge EN PLP Ee oe Power Seat Switch
297. nsmission will exit the gear limiting mode and shift to the appropriate gear The display will read pD 3 7L Engine When in the DRIVE position the first tap to the left will shift down one gear and will display that gear For example if you are in DRIVE and are in 5th gear when you tap the shift lever one time to the left the transmission will downshift to 4th gear and the display will show 4 Another tap to the left will shift the transmission into 3rd gear 4 7L and 5 7L Engine On vehicles equipped with 4 7L or 5 7L engines use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional underdrive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear im proves vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades ERS 1 2 and 3 are underdrive gears ERS 4 is direct drive ERS 5 Overdrive is the same as the normal 4th gear When in the DRIVE position in 1st through 4th gear the first tap to the left will display the ERS designation for the current gear the transmission will not downshift For example if you are in DRIVE and are in 3rd direct gear when you tap the shift lever one time to the left the display will show 4 ERS 4 is direct gear Another tap to the left will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 the added underdrive NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 289 gear When in the DRIVE position in 5th gear the first tap to the left w
298. nt The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most effi cient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps
299. ntifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Fluids Lubri cants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper coolant type When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer additional engine cooling may be required If this situa tion is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use partial Recirculation A C mode to provide additional comfort Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air condi tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication t
300. nts and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Transfer Case Fluid Level Check Inspect the transfer case for fluid leaks If a fluid leak is found the transfer case fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug located on the back side of the transfer case The fluid level should be at the bottom edge of the filler plug hole when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid Add fluid at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole when the vehicle is in a level position Drain First remove fill plug then remove drain plug Recom mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs 20 to 34 N m CAUTION When installing plugs do not overtighten You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Transmission Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid
301. ny of the following ture occurs have an authorized dealer service the system Continued promptly NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 e Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the six to eight seconds after the ignition switch is first turned on e Remains on after the six to eight second interval or e Flickers or comes on and remains on for any period of time while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see the following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable NOTE e A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually in dicative of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment e Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash inv
302. o dirt film and other obstructions sticker toll box etc on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly Automatic Headlight Leveling HID Headlights Only This feature prevents the headlights from interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in vehicle pitch 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights come on at a low intensity level whenever the engine is running and the transmis sion is not in the PARK position The lights remain on until the ignition switch is turned OFF or the parking brake is engaged The headlight switch must be used for normal night time driving Fog Lights If Equipped H The fog light switch is located in the multifunction lever To activate the fog lights turn on the park turn lights low beam headlights or Auto head lights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever A light in the instrument cluster shows when the fog lights are on Front Fog Light Control NOTE e Turning on the high beam headlights turns off the fog lights e A front fog light is a lighting device providing illumi nation forward of the vehicle under conditions of fog N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 rain snow or dust Principally the front fog light supplements the lower
303. o REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls you lose forward motion or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back care fully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 297 If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle
304. o minimize the possibility of com pressor damage when the system is started again 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Operating Tips Chart CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT oet the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle m set the Mode control to Recirculate with A C on and roll up the windows 195 Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level o with A C on If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel and turn on A C If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor or Defrost Sg HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor d If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level s4 In very cold weather if you Vm need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 4535 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS ll Starting Procedure ANONG E
305. o not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Leather Seat Care And Cleaning MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning com
306. o or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 MPEG Sampling Fre quency in Wie Gars 320 256 224 192 160 125 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may
307. o the vehicle electron ics A blank transmitter is one that has never been programmed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated keys you can program new transmitters to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 2 Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 3 Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound and the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new integrated key is programmed The RKE trans mitter will also be programmed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte grat
308. oll wheel on the iPod will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode you can also press the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During e RND button available on sales code RES radio only fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and the information on the radio display NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 e During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the wrap around mode So if the track is at the same PRESET button again to go back to Play bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards mode counter clockwise to get to the track faster e LIST button The LIST button will display the top e In List mode the radio PRESET Buttons are used as level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob shortcuts to the following lis
309. om Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline 342 STARTING AND OPERATING xe blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your g
310. omatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Engine Oil Fill 4 Power Distribution Center 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Integrated Power Module ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 3 Power Distribution Center 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Integrated Power Module 6 Battery 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Engine Oil Fill 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 11 Air Cleaner Filter 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Id ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolo
311. on Center EVIC allows the Rain Sense feature to be turned off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 of this manual The rain sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms and will not operate under the following conditions e Low Ambient Temperature When the ignition is first turned ON the rain sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tem perature is greater than 32 F 0 C 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Transmission in NEUTRAL Position When the ignition is ON and the transmission is in the NEU TRAL position the rain sensing system will not oper ate until the wiper switch is moved vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Steering Column To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward toward the floor To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as de sired Io lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel out
312. on of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five
313. onditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing The Malfunction Indicator Light flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 6 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 7 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on es ry 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN If the ABS light is on the brake system should be servic
314. only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Fre gem es Wie bps 320 256 224 192 160 126 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non
315. ont passenger seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert9 in Section 2 for more information 4 WD LOW 19 Cruise Indicator CRUISE Tris indicator lights when the speed control system is turned ON 20 Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven There fore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined 21 Shift Lever Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission shift lever selection NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 22 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 23 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Je Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed into the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit wi
316. oolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh antifreeze coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreez
317. or can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS cannot prevent accidents in cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others TCS Traction Control System This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section for more information BAS Brake Assist System The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake applicatio
318. or typical installation instructions refer to Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at Latch Anchorages the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Tether Strap Mounting Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchora
319. otection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be periodically inspected Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Fluid Level Check Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immedi ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and a MIN dot The fl
320. our vehicle This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between 81ae46ab Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles E 85 Fuel Cap CAUTION Only vehicles with the E 85 fuel filler cap gas cap can operate on E 85 NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 345 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame 8tae46a9 a Pues Fuel Requirements 5 If your vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 E 85 Badge fuel or any mixture of these two fuels ETHANOL FUEL E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat ing between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recom mended 346 STARTING AND OPERATING M When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e you do not add less than 5 gal 19 L when refueling e you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 mi 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in drivability during warm up
321. our vehicle is equipped with outside automatic dim ming mirrors they will operate when the inside auto matic dimming mirror is on The outside mirrors operate off the inside mirror switch and will automatically adjust for annoying headlight glare when the inside mirror does Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the drivers door trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Power Mirror Switches Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by the optional Memory Seat Feature Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for details Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in this Section for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped To access an illuminated vanity mirror flip down one of the visors Lift the cover to reveal the mirror The light will turn on automatically UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 Lighted Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Extension If Equipped This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for increased coverage 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FE
322. ower may be noticed when the air conditioning compressor is on This is a normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The Automatic Temperature Control ATC system auto matically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 8135020a Automatic Temperature Controls ATC NOTE The numbers on the temperature dial represent a comfort setting when the Mode knob is set to AUTO and not the actual air temperature Turn the mode control on the right knob to AUTO and place the blower control on the left to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Dial in the comfort setting you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver s or passenger s control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automati cally using the heating system Should the desired com fort level require air conditioning the system will auto matically make the adjustment 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic control operation How ever if the driver and or passenger temperatu
323. pecially when roads are wet or slushy A wedge of water can build up between the tire tread and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking ability and control e After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes ABS Anti Lock Brake System TCS Traction Control System BAS Brake Assist System ERM Electronic Roll Mitigation and ESP Electronic Stability Program All five of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Also your vehicle is equipped with TSC Trailer Sway Control and if it has 4WD with the NV245 two speed transfer case HSA Hill Start Assist and HDC Hill Descent Control ABS Anti Lock Brake System This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 305 WARNING ABS Anti Lock Brake System cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle n
324. ped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where th
325. pen positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switches remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed COMMAND VIEW SKYLIGHTS IF EQUIPPED The two fixed skylights are above the second row seats The glass is tinted to shield the second row occupants from the sun and glare Each skylight includes a roller shade that is concealed in the assembly to block out more light when desired N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 NOTE Hold onto shade handle until shade is com POWER OUTLETS P rae Open H Dar Front Power Outlet To the left and right of the convenience tray lower center of instrument panel is a power outlet for accessories Pull lightly on the tab of the plastic cover to access the 5 outlet Roller Shade 034607106 Front Power Outlet 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING To avoid serious inju
326. ploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has three available operating modes in 4WD HIGH range two available operating modes on 2WD vehicles and one operating mode in 4WD LOW range NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 309 High Range 4WD Models or 2WD Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD HIGH range and in 2WD vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if eguipped is shifted from AWD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to 4WD HIGH range the ESP system will be in this On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or Full Off mode for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor mally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP OFF Switch NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction wh
327. ponents solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue FUSES Inter
328. ps MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 Layer 3 WMA Specification 48 44 1 32 Sampling Fre quency KHz 48 64 96 128 44 1 and 48 160 192 VBR NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin p
329. quipment e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades NN FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 463 Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Tra
330. quires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if re quired to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu struc ture and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconnect phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition comman
331. r because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail able for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle The second row outboard and center seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments or fixed lower at tachments Regardless of the type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 If your child seats are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child seats using the vehicle s seat belts F
332. r ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect p
333. r of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 458 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter
334. r six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
335. rage reading before the reset Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL message and a new DTE value will display Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Display Units of Measure In To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press a
336. re Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light 332 STARTING AND OPERATING xe A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate a warning mes sage to appear or the chime to sound a The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will ed illuminate in the instrument cluster a TIRE LOW PRESSURE message will display in the instru ment cluster for 60 seconds and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected In addition a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will be displayed for 75 seconds when a system fault is detected and a chime will
337. re knobs are set to the full hot or full cold positions the air temperature out of the ducts will be full hot or full cold respectively With the temperature setting in these posi tions the system does not attempt automatic comfort control Air Conditioning The air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing this button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED to flash three times and remain off This indicates that the system is in AUTO and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary Recirculation The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing this button will tem porarily put the system in Recirculation mode This can be used when outside condi tions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present This will cause the LED to illuminate NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the climate control sensor s location Mud on the windshield may also cause poor operation of this system e To provide you with maximum comfort in the auto matic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain off until the engine warms up However the fan will engage immediately if the defrost mode is selected or if you manually select a blower speed Under certain conditions after the vehicle is turned off the climate control system may recalibrate and a noise may be heard for 20 seconds This is part
338. rearward far enough to unsnap the two ball studs on the outboard side of the lamp housing from the two plastic grommets in the quarter outer panel Pull the lamp unit rearward far enough away to access the bulbs 1 Raise the liftgate 2 Remove the two push pins that secure the rear lamp unit to the side of the liftgate opening 81bd6519 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Firmly grasp the appropriate bulb socket on the back 5 Disconnect the electrical connector of the rear lamp unit housing and turn 1 4 turn coun EO TE AE 6 Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the opening in the housing 7 Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 81bd6521 Rear Backup Lamp Bulb 2 Rear Park Stop Lamp Bulb 3 Rear Park Turn Signal Bulb 4 Rear Side Marker Lamp Bulb N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL 1 Remove the two screws securing the CHMSL 815727 2 Twist the bulb socket to remove from the CHMSL housing 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket 4 Replace the bulb reinstall the socket and reattach the CHMSL 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 79 Liters Engine Oil with Filter D
339. required Required Maintenance Intervals e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake NOTE Vehicles built with the 4 7L engine are master cylinder power steering and transmission equipped with sixteen spark plugs one set is located on 4 7L and 5 7L engines and add as needed the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct located on the side of the engine operation The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard At Each Oil Change plug and must be change every 30 000 miles 50 000 km The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a premium plug and must be changed every 102 000 miles e Inspect the brake hoses and lines 170 000 km M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Change the engine oil filter N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 443 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform t
340. ress Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially o
341. rge enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an chorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat An chorage System in this section NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
342. ription 185 eee eee 2 l Bl Sales Code REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And N Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 194 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC VAC ate ea OE EE N era eee Has ee 208 Displays 16 6 eee eee nnne ds O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 209 O Engine Oil Change Indicator System 199 D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD ES COS 444504 03 3 99 9S9 Rs eos 199 And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 217 HCompass Display s hacer eR ERR ES 201 O Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 219 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See O List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA PED SS ERU cpu tu be RE VR YE EP ee See O Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA lg PL rr ll AM FM CD DVD Radio RER REN It EQUIP PCO es 2 as N ER eee pe HD EE he ME O Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped O Operating Instructions uconnect phone li PQUIPPeG opiner SPAR dca e x ep da O Clock Setting Procedure ll Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack si d oe y form rcs H Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play O Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius H Operati
343. river seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Easy Entry Exit Seat under Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio uconnect phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Hill Start Assist When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to HSA Hill Start Assistance under Electronic Brake Control System in Section 5 of this manu
344. rn corners care NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the crossbars installed The load should be secured roof rack Wind forces due to natural cla and placed on top of the crossbars not directly on nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to the roof If it is necessary to place the load on the a load This is especially true on large flat loads roof place a blanket or some other protection and may result in damage to the cargo or your between the load and the roof surface vehicle To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropri ately Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the Roof Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack Continued UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS W Instrument Panel Features 183 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable raad Mi Instrument Cluster 184 RT Rete a het area mae bee an H Instrument Cluster Desc
345. ront to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate 352 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Tra
346. roof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shutdowns the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position e The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you insert the key Once inserted the message Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plun
347. ructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uco
348. ry or death Do not use a three prong adapter Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Rear Power Outlet If Equipped The rear power outlet if equipped is located in the left rear cargo area eg ee 735 ae i EE 255295 BRRR LARIAK Rear Power Outlet All accessories connected to this outlet should be re moved or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw the back of the center console to convert DC current to power from the vehicle s battery even when not in AC current use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow
349. s also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats Some airflow is delivered to defrost while in floor mode so that comfort can be maintained 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Bi Level Air flows both through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console and under the front seats to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow The center console outlets deliver conditioned air while the floor outlets deliver heated air Panel 7 Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow Air Conditioning Press this button to turn on and off the air condi tioning during manual operation only Condi tioned outside air is then directed through the outlets selected on the mode control dial The button includes an LED that illuminates when manual operation is selected NOTE To manually control the air conditioning the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO pos
350. s confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Primar Alternate s Primar Alternate s call one cancel two three our confirmation prompts continue delete ive dial ix download eight emergenc English erase all Espanol star olus pound add location all Francais help home seven eit EE UO NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Voice Commands Primar anguage list names list phones mobile mute mute off new entry n Dager pair a phone ohone pairing phonebook previous record again redial Alternate s pairing phone book send 0 o 0000 set up towing assistance tanster call uconnect Tutorial o o tyagain N voice training ooo Work S 0 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM VR IF EQUIPPED
351. s equipped with rear heated seats the seats closest to the doors are heated The controls for these seats are located on the rear of the center console Rear Heated Seat Switches Press the switch once to select High level heat 4y ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off Two indica tors will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 When the High level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal High level If the High level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to Low level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one indicating the change The Low level setting will turn Off automatically after approximately 30 min utes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at Low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the sea
352. s installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for instal lation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These items may cause serious injury during inflation designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the window bag The area where the window bag is located should remain free from any obstructions NOTE Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat hooks in this vehicle A clothing bar will impede the Continued proper performance of the window bags The front airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity Along with the seat belts 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee front airbags work with the instrument panel knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Window bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions The window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions
353. s not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the rad
354. s of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is se lected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Sound Horn with Lock When YES Y is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Flash Lamps with Lock When YES Y is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Io make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Automatic High Beams
355. s will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 291 overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift into direct gear and Overdrive will be enabled under steady cruise conditions 81008738 d TOW HAUL Switch The TOW HAUL indicator light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission limp home mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear 3 7L engine or in direct gear 4 7L and 5 7L engines until the vehicle is brought to a stop To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever into the PARK position 3 Turn the engine off and be sure to turn the key to the LOCK position 292 STARTING AND OPERATING xe 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVER
356. s with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle e Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold start ing and may affect drivability ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle EER 81607157 Fuel Filler Cap 348 STARTING AND OPERATING See CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indica tor Light to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the malfunction indicator light to turn on NOTE Tighten the gas cap about one quarter tur
357. seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition key to the ACC ON position engine does not need to be running and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times with 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that yo
358. sembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON a chime to sound a Low Pressure message to appear in the EVIC and the graphic display will still show the low tire pressure value flashing Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold The EVIC will also display a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message and the graphic display will show a tire pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure value If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the graphic display After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
359. setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Frequency to change the frequency Select Name to say the name of a channel Radio Menu t itch to the radi e Next Station to select the next station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu 3 Main Menu t itch to th i e Previous Station to select the previous station ain Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Radio Menu t itch to the radi ee eee Uae eee To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Track to change th
360. should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 459 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in th
361. sonal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of three lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the uconnect gps if equipped Press the 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you con tinue the information will display in the selected lan guage NOTE The EVIC will not change the uconnect lan guage selection Please refer to Language Selection in the uconnect phone section of this manual for details Auto Door Locks When YES Y is selected all of the doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Auto Unlock On Exit When YES Y is selected all of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until YES Y or NO N appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first pres
362. splay changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and hand held trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the original hand held transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the learn or training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training B
363. ss O Pinch Protect Feature O Pinch Protect Override D Venting Sunroof Express O Sunshade Operation o Wind Buffeting D Sunroof Maintenance G Ignition Off Operation O Sunroof Fully Closed ll Command View Skylights If Equipped 164 165 165 165 165 165 166 166 166 166 166 166 W Power Outlets eiers spoed RR goede es 167 Front Power Outlet isme serentis 167 B Rear Power Outlet If Equipped 168 ll Power Inverter If Equipped ll Cupholders H Front Cupholders O Cupholders Second Row Seat 172 o Cupholders Third Row Seat 172 l Cargo Area Features 173 OCargo Load HOOP aan a4 needed eaaa 173 Bl Rear Window Features 174 O Rear Window Wiper Washer 174 B Rear Window Defroster If Equipped 175 W Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped 176 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield a Adjusting Rear View Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Th
364. st detent for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight operation Turn to the third detent for AUTO headlight operation if equipped Headlight Switch 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Headlight System If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the third detent or AUTO position to activate the automatic headlight system This system performs two functions With the engine running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO posi tion the headlights will turn on and off based on the surrounding light levels Headlights On Automatically With Wipers If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it also has this customer programmable feature When your headlights are in the AUTO position and the engine is running they will automatically turn on when the wiper system is on If your vehicle is equipped with a Rain Sensitive Wiper System and it is activated the headlights will automati cally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles within approximately one minute and they will turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers completely stop Refer to Windshield Wipers and Washers in this section for more information NOTE When your headlights come on during the daytime the instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower nighttime intensity Refer to Instru ment Panel and Interior Lights below for setting
365. t antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals and children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child contact a physician immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant 408 MAINTAININ
366. t press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the normal starting procedure Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly Refer to Section 6 for proper jump starting procedures and follow th
367. t that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat To avoid heated seat surfaces coming in contact and poten tial seat overheating always ensure that the seat heater is in the Off position before placing any of the seats into a folded flat position if equipped 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 40 20 40 Second Row Folding Seat Fold and Tumble Second Row Seat The left center or right side of the second row seat can be lowered to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room In addition the left and right side of the second row seat can be lowered and tumbled forward to allow access to the third row seat 1 Pull up on the seatback lever located on the outboard side of the seat NOTE Also pulling upward on this handle allows the outboard seating positions to be reclined Seatback Release Lever 2 Fold the seatback down and tumble the seat forward NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 WARNING Do not drive the vehicle with the outer second row seats in the tumbled position The outer second row seats are only intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third row seat Failure to follow these instructions could result in personal injury Fold and Tumble Seat 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If sitting in the third row seat pull rearward on Folding Middle Seatback Seco
368. t to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in this section NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 361 Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is sures before trailer usage reguired when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer eguipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not reguired Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation in this section Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 lbs 907 kg When replacing tires refer to Tires General Informa tion in this section Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits CAUTION Towing De qu eene Dark If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or loaded it should have its own brakes and they vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this This could cause inadequate braking and possible could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher personal i
369. tacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unex pectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING Window Lockout button To enable the window controls press the Window Lockout button again Mes There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Resetting the Auto Up Feature Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reset Auto Up pull the window switch up and close the window completely then pull and hold the switch for one second Window Lockout Switch The Window Lockout switch on the driversdoorallows f gt 2 0 p 1d 5 X CR ENa oa you to disable the window control on the other doors To a aa oe EA UOS EU disable the window controls on the other doors press the Window Lockout Switch 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the
370. tation FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE
371. tenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil
372. th the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 24 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows the front fog lights are ON 25 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN 26 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 3 U S Gallons 8 7 Liters this light will come on and remain on until fuel is added The Low Fuel Warning Light may turn on and off again especially duri
373. the instrument panel lights to full daytime intensity SmartBeams If Equipped The SmartBeam system provides increased forward light ing at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 NOTE If the windshield or SmartBeam mirror is re placed the SmartBeam mirror must be re aimed to ensure proper performance See your local authorized dealer To Activate 1 Select Auto Headlamp Low High Beams Low High Beam Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Section 4 of this manual 2 Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO headlight position 3 Push the multifunction lever away from you toward front of vehicle to engage the high beam mode NOTE This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph 32 km h To Deactivate 1 Pull back on the multifunction lever to manually deactivate the system normal operation of high beams 2 Pull back on the multifunction lever once again to reactivate the system NOTE Broken muddy or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer closer to the vehicle Als
374. the above could cause the battery to explode sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan During cold weather when temperatures are be low freezing point electrolyte in a discharged WARNING battery may freeze Do not attempt jump starting Any procedure other than above could result in because the battery could rupture or explode The uu me battery temperature must be brought up above e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out freezing point before attempting jump start the battery vent e Personal injury or property damage due to battery EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED explosion If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks there will be Continued one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the NN WHAT TODO IN EMERGENCIES 383 vehicle The rear hook will be located on the driver s side of the vehicle NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 2 Wheel Drive Models Only Provided the transmission is operable tow only in NEU TRAL at speeds not exceeding 30 mph
375. the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
376. the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 377 Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from storage 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools as shown Connect 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front axle place it jack handle driver A to two extensions B then to the under the front lower control arm as shown For the rear lug wrench C axle place it under the axle near the wheel to be changed Ensure the jack is closest to the inside of the wheel when jacking on the rear axle Do not raise the vehicle until A you are sure the jack is fully engaged ad A Y 060505250 Assembling Jack Tools Jack Handle Driver 2 Extension Lilli NN Front Jacking Location 9141842b 8147326d Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack s
377. the raised edge wind trip toward the front of the vehicle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 crossbar to the desired position keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame Once the crossbar is in one of the five detent positions retighten the thumb screws to lock the crossbar into position NOTE e To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not in use place the front crossbar in the first detent from the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle e If the rear crossbar or any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio antenna if equipped you may 1 Front of Vehicle 3 Thumb Screws experience interruption of satellite radio reception For 2 Raised Edge Wind Trip improved satellite radio reception place the rear cross bar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle when not in use 037605630 The optional crossbars must also be secured in one of the five detent positions marked with an arrow on the siderails to prevent movement To move the crossbars e The grab handles on the back of the vehicle if loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of equipped are not to be used as a towing feature each crossbar approximately eight turns then move the 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Continued e To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle DO e Travel at reduced speeds and tu
378. this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric Front Cupholders shock and failure 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Cupholders Second Row Seat Cupholders Third Row Seat The second row seat has two cupholders in the center The third row seat passengers have cupholders on the left armrest Lower the center armrest Refer to Seats in this and right rear trim panels section Press the front of the cupholder and the cup Uu E holder will come out of the armrest Cupholders Third Row Seat HE Cupholders Second Row Seat N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Load Floor The panel in the load floor is reversible for added utility One side is carpeted and the other side features a plastic lined tray which holds a variety of items The cargo load floor is held by spring loaded latches In order to use the cargo load floor use the following procedure GEN N i QN Wh ANN N nat L SE N x Rear Storage Cover NOTE The cargo load floor latches should not be used as cargo tie downs 1 Flip up pull loop s so they are perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Pull up on loop s and twist 90 degrees so they are parallel to the slotted hole in tray 3 Lift tray over loop s and reposition tray ne N NAT ut N RR SECA k TEL 2 Ly ee A qur
379. thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid Level Check 4 7L and 5 7L Engine Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the mo fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type To check the fluid level properly the following procedure Continued must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature The fluid level is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil throu
380. tions were met 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead console Never leave children in a vehicle with the keys in i the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or Power Sunroof Switch any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 034206846 j NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Opening Sunrocf Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Exp
381. to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of the appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position 308 STARTING AND OPERATING M The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument WARNING cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent the Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents in possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the cluding those resulting from excessive speed in prevailing road conditions turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be ex
382. to restart the rear wiper Rear Window Defroster If Equipped Press this button located on the climate control panel to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated side mirrors if equipped An LED in the button will illuminate to indicate the rear window de froster is on The defroster automatically turns off after about 10 minutes of operation 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the rear window defroster do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack The load must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars NOTE If not equipped with crossbars your authorized dealer can order and install Mopar crossbars built specifically for this roof rack system Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity The optional crossbars must be installed using the correct orientation the longer crossbar toward the front with
383. tronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE See If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted say List Phones The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or de lete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the uconnect phone will r
384. ts on the iPod to list the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this e Preset 3 Albums system dor Md e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is e Preset 5 Audiobooks another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod e Preset 6 Podcasts e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See CAUTION e Leaving the iPod or any supported device any where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines Placing items on the iPod or connections to the iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Failure to following this warning could result in an accident uconnect studios SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130
385. ture at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated when ESP is off To turn ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any other position and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off road use only 4WD Low Range Full Off This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4WD LOW range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from AWD HIGH range or NEUTRAL to 4WD LOW range the ESP system will be in this Full Off mode In 4WD LOW range ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the normal ESP stability function returns but TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system shuts off ESP is deactivated at low vehic
386. u have successfully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS
387. uid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap 1 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling point or is unidentified as to specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture CAUTION Do not allow a petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Seal damage may result Front Rear Axle Fluid Front Axle Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be to the bottom of the oil fill hole Rear Axle Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be 1 2 inch 1 cm below the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Selection of Lubricant Use only the manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubrica
388. ull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has an automatic locking retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch For the outboard seating positions route the tether over plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the the head rests and attach the hook to the tether anchor child restraint secure try a different seating position located on the back of the seat WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to incre
389. umbers on the Temperature dial are no longer valid in this mode This mode allows the user to select any desired air temperature When the temperature knob is in full conterclockwise position the air temperature will be Cooler As the knob is rotated clockwise the temperature will increase gradually until the knob reaches the full clockwise position 817dd45b NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 NOTE Regardless of the type of operation when a temperature knob is set to the full clockwise or full counterclockwise position the system will deliver full hot or full cold air out of the ducts respectively The operator can override the AUTO mode setting and select the direction of the air by rotating the right mode knob to one of the following positions When the Mode is set to any position other than AUTO the automatic control of air temperature is disabled The user must adjust the temperature knobs to obtain the desired tem perature Defrost Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles Some airflow is delivered to the floor while in defrost so that comfort can be maintained NOTE The defrost mode is not automatically selected It must be manually selected when desired Defrost Floor ve Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets ef and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air i
390. upports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers 354 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx A weight distributing hitch system works by applying PARNING leverage through spring load bars They are typically e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight system may reduce handling stability and brak to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s ing performance and could result in an accident When used in accordance with the manufacturer s direc Weight distributing hitch systems may not be tions it provides for a more level ride offering more compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi control also dampens sway caused by traffic and cross tional information winds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distrib uting load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier trailer tongue weights TW and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross ax
391. ur body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap Latch Plate 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In
392. uring pro longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between First and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result 294 STARTING AND OPERATING xe ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS NOTE Prior to off road driving remove the front air dam to prevent damage The front air dam is attached to the lower front fascia with quarter turn fasteners and can be removed by hand When To Use 4WD LOW Range If Equipped When off road driving shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction This range should be limited to extreme situa tions such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pull
393. uthorized Chrysler Dealer 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter d Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 451 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the top row of spark plugs 4 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L and 5 7L Engines Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Change the transfer case fluid Replace the accessory drive belt s C C C O O G C C C O L L Li Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 452 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Inspect the front and rear axle fluid
394. utton NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 6 Firmly press and release the learn or training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace
395. ux aga ddr 2 318 vcio C 71 Satellite Radio Antenna x oduceak awed sce 253 Satellite Radio uconnect studios 252 257 Schedule Maintenance e 441 ocat DeM Red ER s iare dure sho eon em EO ER S 47 Ded Dells iss vs Ge Rose ee SHE bee De Gs 40 73 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 45 And Pregnant Voet 454 65 56 oe y RS 48 Child Restraint amp 22 ax aa 6 oc RE RE ESE EE 61 69 arci AM P 48 Front Seat 480 INDEX NEE id InspecHOl as teeta Soe amas bk os oe IE URGE 73 Maintenance 64 44 4844 cab eA EEN ER 3 33 420 Pretensioners ees 47 Reminde PCR E TCR TT STETIT AE NN 192 Shoulder Belt Anchorage s d t2004e0ke 4 5 24 45 oe EE E E EE EEE T 117 sono MP EE 117 ion APP a Hake Gee 418 Ede e 133 Fold and Tumble Rear 124 Head Restraints 00000000 120 Pleated sehen EE ERA 8 RAS oe ee ee 120 122 Lumbar ou DOB ALS OAR ONS ETE 119 MOMON Sod Gea budge Gen Ges ered owe EE 129 es AR AE E cris Oe ee eS 119 120 Bear Polen 4 tau eos 9 P9 ee one 15s 124 128 Reels as SES RARR TATE eae ye eae ee 118 Seatback Release leeren 128 Security Against Theft i 22i ehe i2 93 6952 20 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 20 188 Selection of Oil ue one awe wa a OR and s RU ER 395 Sentry Key Immobilizer 236 pee 17 Sentry Kev Programming auo dos Roe dem RA ex ene 19 petit Key Replacement 44255 64445 099
396. ve the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Cleaning The Rear Park Assist Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could damage the sensors REAR CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Vehicles with a uconnect tunes radio may be equipped with a rearview camera located on the rear liftgate that allows you to see an on screen image on the navigation radio screen of the rear of your vehicle whenever the vehicle is put into REVERSE WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Camera System Always check care fully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must con tinue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Camera system should only be used as a parking aid The Rear Camera system is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path Continued 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VE
397. w road noise e Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar e fully closed windows 3 e You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be e dry weather conditions and spoken eight zero zero e smooth road surface e operation from the driver s seat e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the uconnect phone e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume Far End Audio Performance e n a convertible vehicle system performance may be e Audio quality is maximized under compromised with the convertible top down e low to medium blower setting 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the uconnect phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait
398. ward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle upward until fully engaged N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The adjust able pedal system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position The position of the brake and accelerator pedals can be adjusted without compromising safety or comfort in actuating the pedals Adjustable Pedal Switch Press the bottom of the switch to move the pedals forward away from the driver Press the top of the switch to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The pedals can be adjusted while driving ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED e The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in pau euge ote 2o ee a UE REVERSE R or when the Electronic Speed Control is poe T m T B died EE N ON A message will be displaye
399. xs 898 3 eoe s 436 Fuel Flexible See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fuel System Caution a9 9 e Purse Rhe 342 348 349 lo CT 420 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 157 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 347 349 391 Gasoline Fuel iris ae E09 4 19 R0 339 Gasoline Reformulated 340 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 340 Gauges Coolant Temperature iu suero EER DERDE NE 190 io ETE TOE ETES TERT ETETE 199 DDGOGUOHIGIE 4525064584 bone RAE he EE DE 185 TOMICE vissie oboe oe RU RO eee 188 Gear Ranges opse te reeGeee es Bee ES UE ES 286 General Information 20 26 112 339 Klass Clean ie Cm 419 Gross Axle Weight Rating 350 353 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 350 352 fc qa TT 350 Hands Free Phone uconnect 84 Hazard Warning Flasher ss soes ore n yen 372 Head Ree Waits 20 6 3 nae s Ote anges ER Uo e 120 Head JA Pr 120 TICAOUCGIS ET EE EE ENE 135 Bulb Replacement 33 9 929 99 24046 sae eo o lt 428 Nn INDEX 473 Ain cha 419 On With Wipers uuu soror ea ESOS Ed eS 136 ocium P 428 Heated MOTON MP yes eee ead oye ee ees 83 Heated Seats sakkie OE bor oe EE 120 122 Heater Engine Block was dare 4 ies 283 iek Bean IndieabOE oase cie iue des RRERRRAS 186 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 141 Hill Descent Contro
400. y pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every
401. y severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the front rear axles of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 359 NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may dam age your vehicle Continued CAUTION Continued e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is
402. yed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will flash in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the overhead console or center of the headliner This is where the compass sensor is located 0 1 6 7 89 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 040506040 2 Press the MENU button until Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu is reached 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance is displayed in the EVIC UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to change the variance number Continue until desired number is reached 5 Press either MENU SCROLL or COMPASS TEMP button to set the value and exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Per
403. your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your uconnect phone The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the uconnect phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call

2009 Jeep Commander

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents